Nokia Solutions and Networks T5DJ1 SC4812T Lite @ 800 MHz CDMA BTS User Manual TLite

Nokia Solutions and Networks SC4812T Lite @ 800 MHz CDMA BTS TLite

Contents

Users manual 1 of 2

DRAFT68P64115A18–1Mar 2003ENGLISHCDMASoftware Release R2.16.1.xTechnicalInformation1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP800 Mhz
DRAFTSPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICENoticeWhile reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola, Inc. assumes no liability resulting from anyinaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from use of the information obtained herein. The information in this document has beencarefully checked and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies or omissions. Motorola,Inc. reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein and reserves the right to revise this document and to makechanges from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person of revisions or changes. Motorola, Inc. does notassume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product, software, or circuit described herein; neither does it conveylicense under its patent rights or the rights of others.It is possible that this publication may contain references to, or information about Motorola products (machines and programs),programming, or services that are not announced in your country. Such references or information must not be construed to meanthat Motorola intends to announce such Motorola products, programming, or services in your country.CopyrightsThis instruction manual, and the Motorola products described in this instruction manual may be, include or describe copyrightedMotorola material, such as computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States andother countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted material, including the exclusive right to copy,reproduce in any form, distribute and make derivative works of the copyrighted material. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorolamaterial contained herein or in the Motorola products described in this instruction manual may not be copied, reproduced,distributed, merged or modified in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase ofMotorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under thecopyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, as arises by operation of law in the sale of a product.Usage and Disclosure RestrictionsLicense AgreementThe software described in this document is the property of Motorola, Inc. It is furnished by express license agreement only and maybe used only in accordance with the terms of such an agreement.Copyrighted MaterialsSoftware and documentation are copyrighted materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law. No part of the software ordocumentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language orcomputer language, in any form or by any means, without prior written permission of Motorola, Inc.High Risk ActivitiesComponents, units, or third–party products used in the product described herein are NOT fault–tolerant and are NOT designed,manufactured, or intended for use as on–line control equipment in the following hazardous environments requiring fail–safecontrols: the operation of Nuclear Facilities, Aircraft Navigation or Aircraft Communication Systems, Air Traffic Control, LifeSupport, or Weapons Systems (“High Risk Activities”). Motorola and its supplier(s) specifically disclaim any expressed or impliedwarranty of fitness for such High Risk Activities.
DRAFTSPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICETrademarks and Motorola are registered trademarks of Motorola, Inc.Product and service names profiled herein are trademarks of Motorola, Inc. Other manufacturers’ products or services profiledherein may be referred to by trademarks of their respective companies. Copyright 2003 Motorola, Inc.Printed on Recyclable PaperREV012501
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFTiMar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTSOptimization/ATPTable of Contents...
Table of Contents 68P64115A18–11X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFTii Mar 2003ContentsFCC Requirements xviii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Content xviii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FCC Part 15 Requirements xviii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FCC Part 68 Requirements xix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreword xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Safety xxii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Revision History xxiv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 1 Introduction 1-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optimization Manual Scope and Layout 1-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Scope and Layout 1-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assumptions and Prerequisites 1-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Document Composition 1-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose of the Optimization 1-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Why Optimize? 1-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What Is Optimization? 1-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What Happens During Optimization? 1-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When to Optimize 1-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New Installations 1-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site Expansion 1-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Periodic Optimization 1-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repaired Sites 1-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Test Equipment and Software 1-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 1-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Policy 1-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Calibration 1-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Cable Calibration 1-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment Warm–up 1-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMF computer and software 1-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communications system analyzer CDMA/analog 1-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional Equipment 1-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Documents and Related Publications 1-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Documents 1-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Related Publications 1-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terms and Abbreviations 1-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard and Non–standard Terms and Abbreviations 1-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS Equipment Identification 1-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment Overview 1-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame Configurations 1-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logical BTS 1-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Assemblies and FRUs 1-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCCP Cage Configuration and 1X Devices 1-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BBX–1X and BBX2 Interchangeability 1-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS Sector Configurations 1-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 2 Preliminary Operations 2-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preliminary Operations: Overview 2-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents68P64115A18–11X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFTiiiMar 2003Cell–site Types 2-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CDF/NECF 2-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site Equipage Verification 2-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial Installation of Boards/Modules 2-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Frame SCCP Configuration Switch 2-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet LAN 2-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet LAN Termination 2-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre-Initial Power-up Tests 2-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Tools 2-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabling Inspection 2-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial Inspection and Setup 2-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC Power System Pre-power Application Test 2-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External AC Power Connection Verification 2-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying AC Power 2-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC Power Application and Testing 2-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries) 2-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Discharge Test 2-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Removal 2-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove DC Power 2-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Power Removal 2-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Application – Normal Power–up 2-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Application Procedures 2-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Internal AC Power 2-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apply DC Power 2-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 3 Optimization/Calibration 3-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to Optimization and Calibration 3-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 3-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optimization Process Summary 3-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell-site Types 3-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CDF/NECF 3-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS System Software Download 3-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site Equipage Verification 3-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the LMF 3-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Packet BTS files 3-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMF Features and Installation Requirements 3-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMF File Structure Overview 3-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMF Home Directory 3-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NECF Filename Conventions and Directory Location 3-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMF Installation and Update Procedures 3-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy BTS and CBSC CDF (or NECF) Files to the LMF Computer 3-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Named HyperTerminal Connection for MMI Communication 3-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Span Lines – Interface and Isolation 3-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T1/E1 Span Interface 3-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolate BTS from T1/E1 Span(s) 3-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T1/E1 Span Isolation 3-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMF to BTS Connection 3-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connect the LMF to the BTS 3-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the LMF 3-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents 68P64115A18–11X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFTiv Mar 2003Basic LMF Operation 3-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The LMF Display and the BTS 3-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphical User Interface Overview 3-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding GUI Operation 3-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command Line Interface Overview 3-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logging Into a BTS 3-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logging Out 3-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Establishing an MMI Communication Session 3-31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Online Help 3-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinging the Processors 3-33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinging the BTS 3-33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Download the BTS 3-36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 3-36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ROM Code 3-36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM Code 3-36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify GLI ROM Code Loads 3-38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Download RAM Code and Data to MGLI and GLI 3-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Download RAM Code and Data to Non–GLI Devices 3-40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting CSM Clock Source and Enabling CSMs 3-41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enable MCCs 3-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification 3-44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) Sub–system Description 3-44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Panel LEDs 3-45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Frequency Receiver/High Stability Oscillator (LFR/HSO) 3-46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSM Frequency Verification 3-47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification) 3-47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPS Initialization/Verification 3-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LORAN–C Initialization/Verification 3-53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Set-up 3-55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Test Equipment to the BTS 3-55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supported Test Equipment 3-56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment Warm-up 3-59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Set Calibration 3-72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 3-72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration Procedures Included 3-72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPIB Addresses 3-73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Test Equipment 3-73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manually Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab 3-74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatically Selecting Test Equipment in the Serial Connection Tab 3-75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating Test Equipment 3-76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating Cables Overview 3-77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating Test Cabling using Communications System Analyzer 3-78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrate Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer 3-79 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Cable Loss Values 3-81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting TX Coupler Loss Value 3-82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bay Level Offset Calibration 3-83 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose of Bay Level Offset Calibration 3-83 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What is BLO Calibration? 3-83 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Verification During Calibration 3-84 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When to Calibrate BLOs 3-84 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BLO Calibration Data File 3-84 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents68P64115A18–11X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFTvMar 2003Test Equipment Setup for RF Path Calibration 3-88 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit (TX) Path Calibration Description 3-88 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Calibration and the LMF 3-89 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Calibration 3-91 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All Cal/Audit and TX Calibration Procedure 3-92 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Download BLO Procedure 3-94 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration Audit Introduction 3-95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Path Audit 3-95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Audit Test 3-95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create CAL File 3-97 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS Set–up and Calibration 3-98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS Description 3-98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS Parameters 3-98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and Setting RFDS Parameters 3-99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS TSU NAM Programming 3-102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explanation of Parameters Used When Programming the TSU NAM 3-102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Valid NAM Ranges 3-103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Antenna Map Data 3-104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set RFDS Configuration Data 3-105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS Calibration 3-106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program TSU NAM 3-108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarms Testing 3-109 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Verification 3-109 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Reporting Display 3-109 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Testing Set–up 3-109 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Fail Alarm 3-110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minor Alarm 3-110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before Leaving the Site 3-110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 4 Automated Acceptance Test Procedures 4-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automated Acceptance Test Procedure 4-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 4-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reduced ATP 4-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATP Test Options 4-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATP Prerequisites 4-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX/RX Antenna Connections 4-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acceptance Tests – Test Set–up 4-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Test Equipment 4-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acceptance Test Equipment Set Up 4-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests 4-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All–inclusive Tests 4-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All TX/RX ATP Test 4-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All TX ATP Test 4-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All RX ATP Test 4-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Individual Acceptance Tests 4-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Individual Tests 4-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test 4-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 4-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spectral Purity TX Mask Acceptance Test 4-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Waveform Quality (Rho) Acceptance Test 4-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 4-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents 68P64115A18–11X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFTvi Mar 2003Waveform Quality (Rho) Acceptance Test 4-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test 4-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 4-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test 4-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test 4-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 4-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Test 4-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RX FER Acceptance Test 4-27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 4-27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FER Acceptance Test 4-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generating an ATP Report 4-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 4-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATP Report 4-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 5 Leaving the Site 5-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating Calibration Data Files 5-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prepare to Leave the Site 5-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing External Test Equipment 5-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset All Devices and Initialize Site Remotely 5-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bringing Modules into Service with the LMF 5-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminating LMF Session/Removing Terminal 5-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting BTS T1/E1 Spans 5-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before Leaving the site 5-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 6 Basic Troubleshooting 6-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Troubleshooting: Overview 6-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 6-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: Installation 6-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Log into Cell-Site 6-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Communicate with Power Meter 6-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Communicate with Communications System Analyzer 6-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Communicate with Signal Generator 6-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: Download 6-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Download DATA to Any Device (Card) 6-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot ENABLE Device 6-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LPA Errors 6-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: Calibration 6-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bay Level Offset Calibration Failure 6-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration Audit Failure 6-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Troubleshooting: RF Path Fault Isolation 6-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 6-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If Every Test Fails 6-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify BLO Checkbox 6-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single–Sided BLO Checkbox 6-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If Faults Are Isolated 6-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault Isolation Flowchart 6-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flowchart Prerequisites 6-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Power Output Fault Isolation Flowchart 6-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP 6-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS Passed Reduced ATP Tests but Has Forward Link Problem in Normal Operation 6-15 . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents68P64115A18–11X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFTviiMar 2003Cannot Perform TX Mask Measurement 6-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot Time Offset Measurement 6-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Perform Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement 6-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: Receive ATP 6-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi–FER Test Failure 6-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: CSM Check–list 6-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Problem Description 6-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intermittent 19.6608 MHz Reference Clock / GPS Receiver Operation 6-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No GPS Reference Source 6-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checksum Failure 6-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPS Bad RX Message Type 6-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSM Reference Source Configuration Error 6-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Takes Too Long for CSM to Come INS 6-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: SCCP Backplane 6-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 6-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connector Functionality 6-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting Procedure 6-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Control Problems 6-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC Power Problems 6-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX and RX Signal Routing Problems 6-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: RFDS 6-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 6-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All Tests Fail 6-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All RX and TX Paths Fail 6-27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All Tests Fail on a Single Antenna 6-27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors 6-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Status Indicators 6-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module LED Status (except GLI2, CSM, BBX, MCC) 6-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC/DC Converter LED Status Combinations 6-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSM LED Status Combinations 6-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GLI2 LED Status Combinations 6-31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GLI2 Pushbuttons and Connectors 6-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BBX LED Status Combinations 6-33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCC LED Status Combinations 6-33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LPA LED Status Combinations 6-34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: Span Control Link 6-35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Span Problems (No Control Link) 6-35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set BTS Site Span Configuration 6-37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix A Data Sheets A-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets A-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verification of Test Equipment Used A-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site Checklist A-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preliminary Operations A-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre–Power and Initial Power Tests A-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Optimization Checklist A-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPS Receiver Operation A-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LFR Receiver Operation A-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LPA IM Reduction A-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Bay Level Offset / Power Output Verification for 3–Sector Configurations A-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Antenna VSWR A-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RX Antenna VSWR A-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents 68P64115A18–11X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFTviii Mar 2003Alarm Verification A-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site Serial Number Check List A-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCCP Shelf A-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LPAs A-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B PN Offset/I & Q Offset Register Programming Information B-1 . . . . . . . . PN Offset Programming Information B-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PN Offset Background B-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PN Offset Usage B-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix C-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix C-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Usage & Background C-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detailed Optimization/ATP Test Matrix C-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output D-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output D-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Usage & Background D-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E CDMA Operating Frequency Information E-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information E-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction E-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1900 MHz PCS Channels E-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating 1900 MHz Center Frequencies E-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800 MHz CDMA Channels E-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating 800 MHz Center Frequencies E-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix F Test Equipment Preparation F-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Preparation F-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose F-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses F-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester GPIB Address F-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent E4432B Signal Generator GPIB Address F-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advantest R3267 Spectrum Analyzer GPIB Address F-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advantest R3562 Signal Generator GPIB Address F-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 8935 Series E6380 (formerly HP 8935) Test Set GPIB Address F-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hewlett Packard HP8921A and HP83236A/B GPIB Address F-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advantest R3465 Communications Test Set GPIB Address F-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address F-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 437 Power Meter GPIB Address F-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address F-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RS232 GPIB Interface Adapter F-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Inter–unit Connection, Testing, and Control F-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inter–unit Connection, Testing, and Control Settings F-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8921A with PCS Interface Test Equipment Connections F-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8921A with PCS Interface System Connectivity Test F-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pretest Setup for HP 8921A F-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pretest Setup for Agilent 8935 F-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advantest R3465 Connection F-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R3465 GPIB Clock Set–up F-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents68P64115A18–11X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFTixMar 2003Pretest Setup for Advantest R3465 F-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 8932/E4432B Test Equipment Interconnection F-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent E4406A/E4432B Test Equipment Interconnection F-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advantest R3267/R3562 Test Equipment Interconnection F-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment Calibration F-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration Without the LMF F-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester Self–alignment (Calibration) F-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating HP 437 Power Meter F-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter F-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Cable Calibration F-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating Test Cable SetupUsing HP PCS Interface (HP83236) F-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465 F-33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix G Download ROM Code G-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downloading ROM Code G-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exception Procedure – Downloading ROM Code G-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix H In–service Calibration H-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction H-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose H-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment Stabilization and Calibration H-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1X Test Equipment Requirements H-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Delta Calibration H-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction H-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration H-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advantest R3267 Power Delta Calibration H-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 8935 series E6380A Power Delta Calibration H-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP8921A Power Delta Calibration H-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advantest R3465 Power Delta Calibration H-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In–Service Calibration H-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index Index-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents 68P64115A18–11X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFTxMar 2003List of FiguresFigure 1-1: Null Modem Cable Detail 1-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-2: 1X SCt4812T–Lite BTS Frame 1-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-3: I/O Interconnect Plate 1-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-4: SCCP Shelf 1-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-5: DRF and TRF Details 1-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-6: SC4812T Lite Stand–alone PA Configuration with Bandpass Filters 1-27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-7: SC4812T Lite Companion Frame LPA Configuration with 2:1 Combiners 1-27 . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1: 800 MHz Configuration Switch Card 2-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-2: Backplane DIP Switch Settings 2-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-3: External Ethernet LAN Connectors 2-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-4: DC PDA 2-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-5: Meter Alarm Panel (MAP) 2-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-6: Heat Exchanger Blower Assembly and Circuit Breakers 2-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-1: LMF Folder Structure 3-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-2: Span I/O Board T1 Span Isolation 3-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-3: LMF Connection Detail 3-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-4: BTS Login screen – identifying circuit and packet BTS files 3-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-5: Self–Managed Network Elements (NEs) state of a packet mode SC4812T 3-22 . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-6: Available packet mode commands 3-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-7: Packet mode site with MCC–1 and BBX–1 under LMF control 3-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-8: LMF Computer Common MMI Connections 3-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-9: BTS Ethernet LAN Termination Diagram 3-33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-10: CSM MMI Terminal Connection 3-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-11: IS–95A/B Cable Calibration Test Setup – CyberTest, Agilent 8935, Advantest R3465, and HP 8921A 3-60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-12: IS–95A/B and CDMA 2000 1X Cable Calibration Test Setup –Agilent E4406A/E4432B and Advantest R3267/R3562 3-61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-13: CDMA2000 1X Cable Calibration Test Setup – Agilent 8935/E4432B and Agilent E7495A 3-62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-14: TX Calibration Test Setup –CyberTest (IS–95A/B) and Agilent 8935 (IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X) 3-63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-15: TX Calibration Test Setup – Using Power Meter 3-64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-16: TX Calibration Test Setup – Agilent E4406A and Advantest R3567 (IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X) 3-65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-17: IS–95A/B ATP Test Set–up, TRDC Shown – CyberTest, Advantest R3465, and Agilent 8935 3-66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-18: IS–95A/B ATP Test Setup – HP 8921A 3-67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-19: IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X ATP Test Setup With DRDCs – Agilent Test Equipment 3-68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-20: IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X ATP Test Setup With DRDCs – Advantest R3267/3562 Test Equipment 3-69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-21: IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X ATP Test Setup With TRDCs – Agilent Test Equipment 3-70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents68P64115A18–11X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFTxiMar 2003Figure 3-22: IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X ATP Test Setup With TRDCs – Advantest R3267/3562 Test Equipment, Agilent E7495A 3-71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-23: Cal Setup for TX/Duplexed RX Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer . . 3-79 Figure 3-24: Cal Setup for Non–Duplexed RX Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer3-80 Figure 4-1: SC4812ET Lite Companion Frame Diversity RX Simplified Interconnection Diagram 4-5 Figure 4-2: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display 4-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-3: Code Domain Analyzer CD Power/Noise Floor Display Examples 4-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-1: TX Output Fault Isolation Flowchart 6-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-2: CSM Front Panel Indicators & Monitor Ports 6-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-3: GLI2 Front Panel Operating Indicators 6-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-4: MCC24 and MCC–1X Front Panel LEDs and LED Indications 6-34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-5: MGLI/GLI Board MMI Connection Detail 6-36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure E-1: North America PCS Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation) E-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure E-2: North American Cellular Telephone System Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation). E-5 Figure F-1: Setting Agilent E4406A GPIB Address F-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-2: Setting Agilent E4432B GPIB Address F-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-3: Setting Advantest R3267 GPIB Address F-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-4: Advantest R3562 GPIB Address Switch Setting F-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-5: Agilent 8935 Test Set F-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-6: HP 8921A and HP 83236A/B F-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-7: R3465 Communications Test Set F-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-8: HP 437 Power Meter F-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-9: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter Detail F-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-10: RS232 GPIB Interface Adapter F-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-11: HP 8921A/600 Cable Connections for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB without Rubidium ReferenceF-15 Figure F-12: HP 8921A Cable Connections for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB with Rubidium Reference . . . . . . F-17 Figure F-13: Cable Connections for Test Set without 10 MHz Rubidium Reference F-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-14: Cable Connections for Test Set with 10 MHz Rubidium Reference F-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-15: Agilent 8935/E4432B 10MHz Reference and Even Second Tick Connections F-22 . . . . . Figure F-16: Agilent 10 MHz Reference Connections F-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-17: Advantest 10 MHz Reference and Serial I/O Connections F-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-18: Performing Agilent E4406A Self–alignment (Calibration) F-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-19: Power Meter Detail F-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-20: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter Detail F-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-21: Cable Calibration Using HP8921 with PCS Interface F-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-22: Cable Calibration Using Advantest R3465 F-35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-1: Delta Calibration Setup – Agilent E4432B to HP437 H-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-2: Delta Calibration Setup – Agilent E4432B to Agilent E4406A H-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-3: Delta Calibration Setup – Advantest R3562 to HP437 H-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents 68P64115A18–11X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFTxii Mar 2003Figure H-4: Delta Calibration Setup – Advantest R3562 to HP437 H-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-5: Delta Calibration Setup – Advantest R3562 to R3267 H-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-6: Delta Calibration Setup – Agilent 8935 to HP437 H-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-7: Delta Calibration Setup – Agilent 8935 to Agilent 8935 H-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-8: Delta Calibration Setup – HP8921A to HP437 H-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-9: Delta Calibration Setup – HP8921A to HP8921A H-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-10: Delta Calibration Setup – R3561L to HP437 H-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-11: Delta Calibration Setup – R3561L to R3465 H-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-12: TX Calibration Test Setup – Agilent E4406A, Advantest R3267, and Agilent 8935 withOption 200 or R2K (IS–95A/B and 1X CDMA 2000) H-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-13: TX Calibration Test Setup – HP 8921A/600 w/PCS Interface (1.9 GHz), HP 8921A/600 (800 MHz), and Advantest R3465 (IS–95A/B only) H-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents68P64115A18–11X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFTxiiiMar 2003List of TablesFCC Part 68 Registered Devices xix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 1-1: CDMA LMF Test Equipment Support Table 1-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 1-2: Non–Standard Terms and Abbreviations 1-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 1-3: SCCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Top Shelf) 1-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 1-4: SCCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Bottom Shelf) 1-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 1-5: BTS Sector Configuration 1-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 1-6: Sector Configurations 1-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-1: Initial Installation of Boards/Modules 2-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-2: Initial Inspection and Setup 2-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-3: DC Power System Pre–Power Application Test 2-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-4: AC Voltage Measurements 2-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-5: Applying Internal AC Power 2-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-6: DC Power Application and Tests 2-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-7: Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries) 2-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-8: Battery Discharge Test 2-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-9: DC Power Removal 2-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-10: AC Power Removal 2-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-11: Apply AC Power to BTS Frame 2-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-12: Apply DC Power to BTS Frame 2-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-1: Install LMF using CD ROM 3-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-2: Copying CDF or NECF Files to the LMF Computer 3-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-3: Create HyperTerminal Connection 3-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-4: T1/E1 Span Isolation 3-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-5: Connecting the LMF to the BTS 3-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-6: BTS GUI Login Procedure 3-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-7: BTS CLI Login Procedure 3-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-8: BTS GUI Logout Procedure 3-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-9: BTS CLI Logout Procedure 3-30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-10: Establishing MMI Communication 3-31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-11: Pinging the Processors 3-34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-12: Verify GLI ROM Code Loads 3-38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-13: Download and Enable MGLI and GLI Devices 3-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-14: Download RAM Code and Data to Non–GLI Devices 3-40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-15: Select CSM Clock Source 3-41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-16: Enable CSMs 3-42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-17: Enable MCCs 3-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-18: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification) 3-47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification 3-49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-20: LORAN–C Initialization/Verification 3-53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents 68P64115A18–11X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFTxiv Mar 2003Table 3-21: IS–95A/B–only Test Equipment Interconnection 3-57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-22: CDMA2000 1X/IS–95A/B Test Equipment Interconnection 3-58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-23: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in the Serial Connection Tab 3-74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-24: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-Detect 3-75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-25: Test Equipment Calibration 3-76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-26: Test Cabling Calibration using Comm. System Analyzer 3-78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-27: Calibrate TX/Duplexed RX Test Cabling using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer 3-79 Table 3-28: Calibrating Non–Duplexed RX Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer . . . 3-80 Table 3-29: Setting Cable Loss Values 3-81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-30: Setting TX Coupler Loss Values 3-82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-31: BLO bts–#.cal File Array Branch Assignments 3-85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-32: SC4812T Lite bts–#.cal File Array (By BBX/Sector) 3-86 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-33: Set Up Test Equipment for RF Path Calibration 3-88 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-34: Test Patterns with Channels and Gain Settings Used 3-90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-35: All Cal/Audit and TX Calibration Procedure 3-92 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-36: Download BLO 3-94 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-37: BTS TX Path Audit 3-96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-38: Create CAL File 3-97 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-39: RFDS Parameter Settings 3-99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-40: Definition of Parameters 3-102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-41: Valid NAM Field Ranges 3-103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-42: Set Antenna Map Data 3-104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-43: Set RFDS Configuration Data 3-105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-44: RFDS TSIC Calibration Channel Frequencies 3-106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-45: RFDS Calibration 3-107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-46: Program NAM Procedure 3-108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-47: Alarm Testing Preparation 3-109 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-48: AC Fail Alarm 3-110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-49: Minor Alarm 3-110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-1: To Perform Companion Frame Diversity RX FER,Inter–frame RX Cables Connected(Set Multi–Channel Preselector to MPC) 4-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-2: To Perform Companion Frame Diversity RX FER,Inter–frame RX Cables Disconnected(Set Multi–Channel Preselector to EMPC) 4-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-3: Set Up Test Equipment – TX Output Verify/Control Tests 4-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-4: Additional Diversity RX Test Set–up for Companion Frames 4-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-5: All TX/RX ATP Test Procedure 4-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-6: All TX ATP Test Procedure 4-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-7: All RX ATP Test Procedure 4-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-8: Test Spectral Purity Transmit Mask 4-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-9: Test Waveform Quality (Rho) 4-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents68P64115A18–11X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFTxvMar 2003Table 4-10: Test Pilot Time Offset 4-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-11: Test Code Domain Power/Noise Floor 4-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-12: Test FER 4-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-13: Generating an ATP Report 4-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-1: Copying CAL Files to a Diskette 5-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-2: Copying CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC 5-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-3: Remove External Test Equipment 5-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-4: Reset BTS Devices and Remote Site Initialization 5-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-5: Bring Modules into Service 5-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-6: Remove LMF 5-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-7: Connect T1 or E1 Spans 5-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-8: Check Before Leaving the Site 5-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedures 6-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-2: Force Ethernet LAN A to Active State as Primary LAN 6-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-3: GLI IP Address Setting 6-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-4: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure 6-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-5: Troubleshooting a Communications System Analyzer Communication Failure 6-7 . . . . . . . Table 6-6: Troubleshooting a Signal Generator Communication Failure 6-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-7: Troubleshooting Code Download Failure 6-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-8: Troubleshooting Data Download Failure 6-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-9: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) Failure 6-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-10: LPA Errors 6-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-11: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration Failure 6-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-12: Troubleshooting Calibration Audit Failure 6-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-13: Troubleshooting Forward Link Failure (BTS Passed Reduced ATP) 6-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-14: Troubleshooting TX Mask Measurement Failure 6-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-15: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure 6-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-16: Troubleshooting Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement Failure 6-16 . . . . . . . Table 6-17: Troubleshooting Multi-FER Failure 6-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-18: CSM Reference (Clock) Sources by GPS Type and Kit Number 6-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-19: No GLI Control Through LMF (All GLIs) 6-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-20: No GLI Control Through Span Line Connection (Both GLIs) 6-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-21: MGLI Control Good – No Control Over Co–located GLI 6-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-22: MGLI Control Good – No Control Over AMR 6-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-23: MGLI Control Good – No Control over Co–located BBXs 6-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-24: BBX Control Good – No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic 6-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-25: No MCC–1X/MCC24E/MCC8E Channel Elements 6-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-26: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module 6-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-27: No DC Input Voltage to any SCCP Shelf Module 6-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-28: TX and RX Signal Routing Problems 6-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-29: RFDS Fault Isolation – All Tests Fail 6-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents 68P64115A18–11X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFTxvi Mar 2003Table 6-30: RFDS Fault Isolation – All Tests Fail on Single Antenna Path 6-27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-31: Troubleshoot Control Link Failure 6-35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-32: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration 6-37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-1: Verification of Test Equipment Used A-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-2: Site Checklist A-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-3: Preliminary Operations A-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A3a: Pre–power Checklist A-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A3b: General Optimization Checklist A-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-4: GPS Receiver Operation A-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-5: LFR Receiver Operation A-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-6: LPA IM Reduction A-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-7: TX BLO Calibration (3–Sector: 1–Carrier and 2–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels) A-9 . . . . Table A-8: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3–Sector: 2–Carrier Adjacent Channels) A-10 . . . . . . . . . . Table A-9: TX Antenna VSWR A-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-10: RX Antenna VSWR A-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-11: CDI Alarm Input Verification A-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table B-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn B-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table C-1: SC 4812ET Lite BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix C-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table D-1: BBX Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm) D-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table E-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel E-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table E-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel E-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-1: Verify and Change Agilent E4406A GPIB Address F-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-2: Verify and Change Agilent E4432B GPIB Address F-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-3: Verify and Change Advantest R3267 GPIB Address F-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-4: Verify and/or Change Agilent 8935 (formerly HP 8935) GPIB Address F-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-5: Verify and/or Change HP 8921A and HP 83236A GPIB Addresses F-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-6: Verify and/or Change Advantest R3465 GPIB Address F-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-7: Verify and/or Change Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address F-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-8: Verify and/or Change HP 437 Power Meter GPIB Address F-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-9: Verify and/or Change Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address F-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-10: HP 8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections Without RubidiumReference F-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-11: HP 8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections With Rubidium ReferenceF-16 Table F-12: System Connectivity F-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-13: Pretest Setup for HP 8921A F-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-14: Pretest Setup for Agilent 8935 F-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-15: Advantest R3465 Clock Setup F-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-16: Pretest Setup for Advantest R346 F-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-17: Perform Agilent E4406A Self–alignment (Calibration) F-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-18: HP 437 Power Meter Calibration Procedure F-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-19: Calibrate Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter F-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents68P64115A18–11X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFTxviiMar 2003Table F-20: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface) F-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-21: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465 F-33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table G-1: Download ROM and RAM Code to Devices G-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table H-1: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration Procedure H-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table H-2: Advantest R3267 Power Delta Calibration Procedure H-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table H-3: Agilent 8935 Power Delta Calibration Procedure H-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table H-4: HP8921A Power Delta Calibration Procedure H-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table H-5: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure H-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table H-6: In–Service Calibration H-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FCC Requirements 68P64115A18–11X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFTxviii Mar 2003FCC RequirementsContentThis section presents Federal Communications Commission (FCC)Rules Parts 15 and 68 requirements and compliance information for theSCt4812T/ET/ET Lite series Radio Frequency Base TransceiverStations.FCC Part 15 RequirementsPart 15.19a(3) – INFORMATION TO USERNOTE This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operationis subject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and2. This device must accept any interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesired operation.Part 15.21 – INFORMATION TO USERCAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Motorolacould void your authority to operate the equipment.15.105(b) – INFORMATION TO USERNOTE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with thelimits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of theFCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonableprotection against harmful interference in a residentialinstallation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radiofrequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordancewith the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radiocommunications. However, there is no guarantee thatinterference will not occur in a particular installation. If thisequipment does cause harmful interference to radio or televisionreception, which can be determined by turning the equipmentOFF and ON, the user is encouraged to try to correct theinterference by one or more of the following measures:SReorient or relocate the receiving antenna.SIncrease the separation between the equipment and receiver.SConnect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit differentfrom that to which the receiver is connected.SConsult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician forhelp.
FCC Requirements68P64115A18–11X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFTxixMar 2003FCC Part 68 RequirementsThis equipment complies with Part 68 of the Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules. A label on the GLI3 board, easily visiblewith the board removed, contains the FCC Registration Number for thisequipment. If requested, this information must be provided to thetelephone company.FCC Part 68 Registered DevicesDevice FCC Part 68 IDGroup Line Interface (GLI3) See Note US: IHEXDNANGLI3–1XCisco Model 1900–27 Router US: 5B1DDNDN0006ADC KENTROX Model 537 US: F81USA–31217–DE–NNOTE The BTS equipment is always equipped with the GLI3, < US: IHEXDNANGLI3–1X>, and may be used in conjunction withone or both of the listed registered CSU devices, or another registeredCSU device not listed above.The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment,operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of your T1. Ifthis happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice so thatyou can modify your equipment as required to maintain uninterruptedservice.If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephonecompany will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance ofservice may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephonecompany will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advisedof your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it isnecessary.If you experience trouble operating this equipment with the T1, pleasecontact:Global Customer Network Resolution Center (CNRC)1501 W. Shure Drive, 3436NArlington Heights, Illinois 60004Phone Number: (847) 632–5390for repair and/or warranty information. You should not attempt to repairthis equipment yourself. This equipment contains no customer oruser-serviceable parts.Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Motorola couldvoid your authority to operate this equipment.
Foreword 68P64115A18–11X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFTxx Mar 2003ForewordScope of manualThis manual is intended for use by cellular telephone systemcraftspersons in the day-to-day operation of Motorola cellular systemequipment and ancillary devices.This manual is not intended to replace the system and equipmenttraining offered by Motorola, although it can be used to supplement orenhance the knowledge gained through such training.Obtaining ManualsTo view, download, order manuals (original or revised), visit theMotorola Lifecycles Customer web page at http://services.motorola.com,or contact your Motorola account representative.If Motorola changes the content of a manual after the original printingdate, Motorola publishes a new version with the same part number but adifferent revision character.Text conventionsThe following special paragraphs are used in this manual to point outinformation that must be read. This information may be set-off from thesurrounding text, but is always preceded by a bold title in capital letters.The three categories of these special paragraphs are:NOTE Presents additional, helpful, non-critical information that you canuse. Bold-text notes indicate information to help you avoidan undesirable situation or provides additional informationto help you understand a topic or concept.CAUTION Presents information to identify a situation in which equipmentdamage could occur, thus avoiding damage to equipment.WARNING Presents information to warn you of a potentially hazardoussituation in which there is a possibility of personal injury.The following typographical conventions are used for the presentation ofsoftware information:SIn text, sans serif BOLDFACE CAPITAL characters (a type stylewithout angular strokes: i.e., SERIF versus SANS SERIF) are used toname a command.SIn text, typewriter style characters represent prompts and thesystem output as displayed on an operator terminal or printer.SIn command definitions, sans serif boldface characters represent thoseparts of the command string that must be entered exactly as shown andtypewriter style characters represent command output responsesas displayed on an operator terminal or printer.SIn the command format of the command definition, typewriterstyle characters represent the command parameters.
Foreword68P64115A18–11X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFTxxiMar 2003Reporting manual errorsTo report a documentation error, call the CNRC (Customer NetworkResolution Center) and provide the following information to enableCNRC to open an MR (Modification Request):– the document type – the manual title, part number, and revision character– the page number(s) with the error– a detailed description of the error and if possible the proposed solutionMotorola appreciates feedback from the users of our manuals.Contact usSend questions and comments regarding user documentation to the emailaddress below:cdma.documentation@motorola.comMotorola appreciates feedback from the users of our information.Manual banner definitionsA banner (oversized text on the bottom of the page, for example,PRELIMINARY) indicates that some information contained in themanual is not yet approved for general customer use.24-hour support serviceIf you have problems regarding the operation of your equipment, pleasecontact the Customer Network Resolution Center for immediateassistance. The 24 hour telephone numbers are:NA CNRC +1–800–433–5202EMEA CNRC +44– (0) 1793–565444ASPAC CNRC +86–10–88417733Japan & Korea CNRC +81–3–5463–3550LAC CNRC +51–1–212–4020For further CNRC contact information, contact your Motorola accountrepresentative.
General Safety 68P64115A18–11X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFTxxii Mar 2003General SafetyRemember! . . . Safetydepends on you!!The following general safety precautions must be observed during allphases of operation, service, and repair of the equipment described inthis manual. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specificwarnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design,manufacture, and intended use of the equipment. Motorola, Inc. assumesno liability for the customer’s failure to comply with these requirements.The safety precautions listed below represent warnings of certain dangersof which we are aware. You, as the user of this product, should followthese warnings and all other safety precautions necessary for the safeoperation of the equipment in your operating environment.Ground the instrumentTo minimize shock hazard, the equipment chassis and enclosure must beconnected to an electrical ground. If the equipment is supplied with athree-conductor ac power cable, the power cable must be either pluggedinto an approved three-contact electrical outlet or used with athree-contact to two-contact adapter. The three-contact to two-contactadapter must have the grounding wire (green) firmly connected to anelectrical ground (safety ground) at the power outlet. The power jack andmating plug of the power cable must meet International ElectrotechnicalCommission (IEC) safety standards.NOTE Refer to Grounding Guideline for Cellular Radio Installations –68P81150E62.Do not operate in an explosiveatmosphereDo not operate the equipment in the presence of flammable gases orfumes. Operation of any electrical equipment in such an environmentconstitutes a definite safety hazard.Keep away from live circuitsOperating personnel must:Snot remove equipment covers. Only Factory Authorized ServicePersonnel or other qualified maintenance personnel may removeequipment covers for internal subassembly, or componentreplacement, or any internal adjustment.Snot replace components with power cable connected. Under certainconditions, dangerous voltages may exist even with the power cableremoved.Salways disconnect power and discharge circuits before touching them.Do not service or adjust aloneDo not attempt internal service or adjustment, unless another person,capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation, is present.
General Safety68P64115A18–11X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFTxxiiiMar 2003Use caution when exposing orhandling the CRTBreakage of the Cathode–Ray Tube (CRT) causes a high-velocityscattering of glass fragments (implosion). To prevent CRT implosion,avoid rough handling or jarring of the equipment. The CRT should behandled only by qualified maintenance personnel, using approved safetymask and gloves.Do not substitute parts ormodify equipmentBecause of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not installsubstitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification of equipment.Contact Motorola Warranty and Repair for service and repair to ensurethat safety features are maintained.Dangerous procedurewarningsWarnings, such as the example below, precede potentially dangerousprocedures throughout this manual. Instructions contained in thewarnings must be followed. You should also employ all other safetyprecautions that you deem necessary for the operation of the equipmentin your operating environment.WARNING Dangerous voltages, capable of causing death, are present in thisequipment. Use extreme caution when handling, testing, andadjusting.
Revision History 68P64115A18–11X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFTxxiv Mar 2003Revision HistoryManual Number68P64115A18–1Manual Title1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xVersion InformationThe following table lists the manual version, date of version, andremarks on the version. Revision bars printed in page margins (as shownto the side) identify material which has changed from the previousrelease of this publication.VersionLevel Date of Issue Remarks1Mar 2003 Initial draft t
Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT1-1Chapter 1Introduction1
Optimization Manual Scope and Layout 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT1-2Optimization Manual Scope and LayoutManual Scope and LayoutThis document provides information pertaining to the optimization andaudit tests of the Motorola 1X SCt4812T–Lite BTS frame. Thefollowing subjects are addressed: preliminary background information;optimization and alarm/redundancy tests; Acceptance Test Procedures(ATP) to verify site operation and regulation compliance; site turnover;troubleshooting.This optimization procedure consists of a group of task-oriented tests.Each major test category (Audit, Initial power–up, Calibration, etc.) isdescribed in chapters which are broken down into multi-pageinformation “maps.”Each “map” contains the information necessary to perform the test oroperation. Included are all required input levels, output levels, LocalMaintenance Facility (LMF) application software commands, and testpoint identification. Also described are important test process conceptsand equipment operation which should be understood by the operator.Whenever possible, graphics, flowcharts, or written examplescomplement the information or procedural steps.Assumptions and PrerequisitesThis document assumes that the BTS frames and cabling have beeninstalled per the 1X SC 4812T–Lite BTS Hardware Installation ,68P64115A16 which covers both the physical “bolt down” of theSC 3812T–Lite frame and the specific cabling configurations.1
Optimization Manual Scope and Layout68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT1-3Document CompositionThis document covers the following major areas:SIntroduction, consisting of preliminary background information (suchas component and subassembly locations and frame layouts) to beconsidered by the Cellular Field Engineer (CFE) before performingoptimization or tests.SPreliminary Operations, consisting of jumper configuration of BTSsub–assemblies, pre–power–up tests, initial application of power tothe BTS equipment frames, and initial power–up tests.SOptimization/Calibration, consisting of procedures for downloadingall BTS processor boards, test equipment set–up, RF path verification,BLO calibration and calibration audit, and Radio FrequencyDiagnostic System (RFDS) calibration.SAcceptance Test Procedures (ATP), consisting of automated ATP tests,executed by the LMF, and used to verify all major transmit (TX) andreceive (RX) performance characteristics on all BTS equipment. Thischapter also covers generating an ATP report.SPrepare to Leave the Site, discussing site turnover after ATP iscompleted.SBasic Troubleshooting, consisting of procedures to perform when anATP fails, as well as when incorrect results are obtained during logon,test equipment operation, calibration, and Global Positioning System(GPS) operation.SAppendices include:– Data sheets for CFE’s recording at the site– Pseudorandom Noise (PN) Offset information– Optimization/ATP matrix– BBX Gain set point vs BTS output– CDMA operating frequency programming information– Manual test setup information– Downloading ROM and RAM code– In–service ATP procedures1
Purpose of the Optimization 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT1-4Purpose of the OptimizationWhy Optimize?Proper optimization and calibration ensures that:SAccurate downlink RF power levels are transmitted from the site.SAccurate uplink signal strength determinations are made by the site.What Is Optimization?Optimization compensates for the site-specific cabling and normalequipment variations. Site optimization guarantees that the combinedlosses of the new cables and the gain/loss characteristics and built-intolerances of each BTS frame do not accumulate and cause improper siteoperation.What Happens During Optimization?Overview – During optimization, the accumulated path loss or gain isfirst determined for each RF transmit path in the BTS. These transmitpath loss or gain values are then stored in a database along with RFreceive path default values.RF path definitions – For definitions of the BTS transmit (TX) andreceive (RX) paths, see “What is Bay Level Offset Calibration?” in theBay Level Offset Calibration section of Chapter 3.RF paths and transceiver optimization – Six of the seven Broad BandTransceiver (BBX) boards in each CCP shelf are optimized to specificRX and TX antenna connectors. The seventh BBX board acts in aredundant capacity for BBX boards 1 through 6, and is optimized to allantenna connectors. A single optimization value is generated for eachcomplete path. This eliminates the accumulation of error that wouldoccur from individually measuring and summing the gain and loss ofeach element in the path.Using RF path gain/loss values – BTS equipment factors in the derivedoptimization values internally to adjust transceiver power levels, leavingonly site–specific antenna feedline loss and antenna gain characteristicsto be factored in by the CFE when determining required site EffectiveRadiated Power (ERP) output power levels.1
When to Optimize68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT1-5When to OptimizeNew InstallationsThe following operations and optimization/test actions should beaccomplished for a new BTS or frame installation:1. After the initial site installation, it must be prepared for operation.This preparation includes verifying hardware installation, initialpower–up, downloading of operating code, verifying GPS operation,and verifying transmit and receive paths.2. Next, the optimization is performed. Optimization includesperformance verification and calibration of all transmit and receiveRF paths, and download of accumulated calibration data.3. A calibration audit of all RF transmit paths may be performed anytime after optimization to verify BTS calibration.4. After optimization, a series of manual pre–Acceptance TestProcedure (ATP) verification tests are performed to verifyalarm/redundancy performance.5. After manual pre–ATP verification tests, an ATP is performed toverify BTS performance. An ATP is also required to demonstrateregulation compliance before the site can be placed in service.Site ExpansionOptimization is required after expansion of a site with additional BTSframes.Periodic OptimizationPeriodic optimization of a site may also be required, depending on therequirements of the overall system.Repaired SitesRefer to Appendix C for a detailed FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrixoutlining the minimum tests that must be performed any time a BTS RFsubassembly or cable associated with an RF path is replaced.1
Required Test Equipment and Software 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT1-6Required Test Equipment and SoftwareOverviewTest equipment and software described in this section is required for theoptimization procedure. Common assorted tools such as screwdriversand frame keys are also needed. Read the owner’s manual for all of thetest equipment to understand its individual operation before using thetool in the optimization.PolicyTo ensure consistent, reliable, and repeatable optimization test results,test equipment and software meeting the following technical criteriashould be used to optimize the BTS equipment. Test equipment can, ofcourse, be substituted with other test equipment models if the equipmentmeets the same technical specifications.NOTE During manual testing, you can, of course, substitute testequipment with other test equipment models not supported bythe LMF, but those models must meet the same technicalspecifications.It is the responsibility of the customer to account for any measurementvariances and/or additional losses/inaccuracies that can be introducedas a result of these substitutions. Before beginning optimization ortroubleshooting, make sure that the test equipment needed is on–handand operating properly.Test Equipment CalibrationOptimum system performance and capacity depend on regular equipmentservice and calibration prior to BTS optimization. Follow the originalequipment manufacturer (OEM) recommended maintenance andcalibration schedules closely.Test Cable CalibrationTest cables can make critical differences in optimization accuracy. It isrecommended that cable calibration be run at every BTS with thecomplete test equipment set. This method compensates for test cableinsertion loss within the test equipment itself. No other allowance fortest cable insertion loss needs to be made during the performance oftests.Another method to account for cable loss is by entering it into the LMFduring the optimization procedure. This method requires accurate testcable characterization using shop test equipment. Characterized cablesshould be tagged with the characterization information, and themeasured losses entered into the LMF before field optimization.1
Required Test Equipment and Software68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT1-7Equipment Warm–upAfter arriving at a site, test equipment should be plugged in and turnedon immediately to provide the longest possible time for warm up andstabilization. The following pieces of test equipment must be warmed upfor a minimum of 60 minutes prior to use for BTS optimization or RFDScalibration:SCommunications test set.SRubidium time base.SPower meter.LMF computer and softwareLMF Hardware RequirementsAn LMF computer platform that meets the following requirements (orbetter) is recommended:SNotebook computerS266 MHz (32 bit CPU) Pentium processorSMSr Windows 98R Second Edition (SE) or Windows 2000 operatingsystemS4 GB internal hard disk driveSSVGA 12.1–inch active matrix color display with 1024 x 768(recommended) or 800 x 600 pixel resolution and capability to displaymore than 265 colorsNOTE If 800 x 600 pixel resolution is used, the LMF window must bemaximized after it is displayed.SMemory requirements:– Minimum required RAM: 96 MB– Recommended RAM:–– 128 MB for Windows 98 SE–– 256 MB for Windows 2000S20X CD–ROM driveS3 1/2 inch floppy driveS56kbps V.90 modemSSerial port (COM 1)SParallel port (LPT 1)SPCMCIA Ethernet interface card (for example, 3COM Etherlink III)with a 10BaseT–to–coax adapter1
Required Test Equipment and Software 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT1-8LMF SoftwareThe Local Maintenance Facility (LMF) application program is agraphical user interface (GUI)–based software tool. This product isspecifically designed to provide cellular communications field personnelwith the capability to support the following CDMA Base TransceiverStation (BTS) operations:SInstallationSMaintenanceSCalibrationSOptimizationEthernet LAN TransceiverSPCMCIA Ethernet Adpater + Ethernet UTP Adapter 3COM Model – Etherlink III 3C589B10BaseT/10Base2 ConverterSTransition Engineering Model E–CX–TBT–03 10BaseT/10Base2Converter (or equivalent)NOTE Xircom Model PE3–10B2 or its equivalent can also be used tointerface the LMF Ethernet connection to the frame.Ethernet LAN External In/Out Port AdapterTrompeter Electronics, Inc., ADBJ20–E1–PL75 or equivalent BNC (F)to TRB (M) adapter is required if it is necessary to connect the LMFcomputer to the LAN external interface triaxial connectors located in thepower entry compartment.RS–232 to GPIB interfaceSNational Instruments GPIB–232–CT with Motorola CGDSEDN04XRS232 serial cable or equivalent; used to interface the LMF to the testequipment.SA standard RS–232 cable can be used with the modifications shown inFigure 1-1.NOTE Pin 8 (CTS) does not have to be jumpered/shorted to the othersas it is a driver output. The DTR is already a driver outputsignal. The other pins are to receivers. Short pins 7, 1, 4, 6 oneach cable end.Figure 1-1: Null Modem Cable Detail5327146GNDRXTXRTSRSD/DCDDTR DSRGNDTXRXRTSRSD/DCDDTRDSRON BOTH CONNECTORSSHORT PINS 7, 1, 4, 69–PIN D–FEMALE 9–PIN D–FEMALE52371461
Required Test Equipment and Software68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT1-9Model SLN2006A MMI interface kitSMotorola Model TRN9666A null modem board. Connectors onopposite sides of the board must be used as this performs a nullmodem transformation between cables. This board can be used for25–pin to 8–pin, 25–pin to 25–pin, and 10–pin to 10–pin conversions.SMotorola 30–09786R01 MMI cable or equivalent; used to interfacethe LMF computer serial port connection to the Group Line Interface(GLI), Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM), External TrunkedInterface Board (ETIB), and module debug serial ports.Communications system analyzer CDMA/analog Table 1-1: CDMA LMF Test Equipment Support TableItem Description Test CapabilityTest SetsHewlett Packard, modelHP 8921A (with 83203B) Communications analyzer (includes 83203BCDMA interface option) IS–95A/B onlyMotorola CyberTest Communications analyzer IS–95A/B onlyAdvantest R3465 (with 3561L) Communications analyzer (with 3561 CDMAoption) IS–95A/B onlyAgilent E4406A (with E4432B) Communications analyzer (with Generator) IS–95A/B andCDMA 2000 testingAdvantest R3267 Analyzer (withR3562) Communciations Analyzer with AdvantestR3562 Generator IS–95A/B andCDMA 2000 testingAgilent 8935 series E6380A(formerly HP 8935) with option200 or R2KCommunications test set IS–95A/B andCDMA 2000 testingPower MetersGigatronix 8541C Power meterHP437B (with HP8481A sensor) Power meter with sensor – capable of measuring –30 dBm to 20 dBm A combination of test equipment supported by the LMF may also beused during optimization and testing of the RF communications portionof BTS equipment when the communications system analyzer does notperform all of the following functions:SFrequency counterSDeviation meterSRF power meter (average and code domain)SRF signal generator (capable of DSAT/CDMA modulation)SAudio signal generatorSAC voltmeter (with 600–ohm balanced audio input and highimpedance input mode)SNoise measurement meterSC–Message filterSSpectrum analyzerSCDMA code domain analyzer1
Required Test Equipment and Software 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT1-10GPIB cablesHewlett Packard 10833A or equivalent; one or two meters long, used tointerconnect test equipment and LMF computer.Timing reference cablesSTwo Huber & Suhner 16MCX/11BNC/K02252D or equivalent; rightangle MCX–male to standard BNC–male RG316 cables; 10 ft. longare required to interconnect the communications system analyzer toSGLN4132A and SGLN1145A CSM board timing referencesorSTwo BNC–male to BNC–male RG316 cables; 3 meters (10 feet) long,used to interconnect the communications system analyzer toSGLN4132B and SGLN1145B (and later) CSM front panel timingreferences in the RF Modem FrameDigital multimeterFluke Model 8062A with Y8134 test lead kit or equivalent; used forprecision DC and AC measurements to four decimal places.Directional coupler Narda Model 3020A 20 dB coupler terminated with two Narda Model375BN–M loads, or equivalent.RF attenuatorsS20 dB Fixed attenuator, 20 Watt (Narda 768–20), used in conjunctionwith calibration of test cables or during general troubleshootingprocedures.S10 dB Fixed attenuator, 20 Watt (Narda 768–10), for cable calibrationwith a Cybertest CDMA analyzer.Clamp–on DC current probeAmprobe CT600, or equivalent, 600 A capability with jaw size whichaccommodates 2/0 cable. Used with the DMM for back–up batterycharging testing.Miscellaneous RF adapters, loads, etc.As required to interface test cables and BTS equipment and for varioustest setups. Should include at least (2) 50 Ohm loads (type N) forcalibration and (1) RF short.RF load100W non–radiating RF load used (as required) to provide dummy RFloading during BTS transmit tests.High–impedance conductive wrist strap Motorola Model 42–80385A59; used to prevent damage from ESD whenhandling or working with modules.1
Required Test Equipment and Software68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT1-11Driver bit for tamper–resistant fastenersStar fastener tamper–resistant insert bit set, Grainger 5F530 orequivalent, to remove tamper–resistant fasteners securing the frame rearaccess cover.Optional EquipmentThis section provides a list of additional equipment that might berequired during maintenance and troubleshooting operations.NOTE Not all optional equipment specified in this section will besupported by the LMF in automated tests.DuplexerFiltronics Low IM Duplexer (Cm035–f2) or equivalent; used duringSpectral Purity Receive band noise tests.Frequency counterStanford Research Systems SR620 or equivalent; used if directmeasurement of the 3 MHz or 19.6608 MHz references is required.Spectrum analyzerSpectrum Analyzer (HP8594E with CDMA personality card) orequivalent; required for manual tests other than standard Receive bandspectral purity tests performed by the LMF.LAN testerModel NETcat 800 LAN troubleshooter (or equivalent); used tosupplement LAN tests using the ohm meter.Span line (T1/E1) verification equipmentAs required for the local application.RF test cable (if not provided with test equipment)Motorola Model TKN8231A; used to connect test equipment to the BTStransmitter output during optimization or during general troubleshootingprocedures.Oscilloscope Tektronics Model 2445 or equivalent; used for waveform viewing,timing, and measurements, or during general troubleshooting procedures.2–way splitterMini–Circuits Model ZFSC–2–2500 or equivalent; used to provide thediversity receive input to the BTS.1
Required Test Equipment and Software 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT1-12CDMA subscriber mobile or portable radiotelephone Safco Model 2136–150 with power supply and antenna; used to providetest transmission and reception during BTS maintenance andtroubleshooting. Do not substitute other models that do not featurespecial test modes. Two radios will be required for system anddrive–around testing after optimization and BTS ATP are completed.RF circulatorCirculator (FERROCOM 5809866C01) or equivalent; can substitute fora duplexer during Receive sensitivity Frame Erasure Rate (FER) testingin conjunction with Safco CDMA mobile.High stability 10 MHz rubidium standardStanford Research Systems SR625 or equivalent. Required for CSM andLow Frequency Receiver (LFR)/High Stability Oscillator (HSO)frequency verification.1
Required Documents and Related Publications68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT1-13Required Documents and Related PublicationsRequired DocumentsThe following documents are required to perform optimization of thecell site equipment:SSite Document (generated by Motorola Systems Engineering), whichincludes:– General site information– Floor plan– RF power levels– Frequency plan (includes Site PN and operating frequencies)– Channel allocation (paging, traffic, etc.)– Board placement– Site wiring list– CDF or NECF files (bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf or bts–#.necf andcbsc–#.necf)SDemarcation Document (Scope of Work Agreement)SEquipment manuals for non-Motorola test equipmentRelated PublicationsAdditional, detailed information about the installation, operation, andmaintenance of the 1X SCt4812T–Lite BTS and its components isincluded in the following publications:SCDMA RFDS User’s Guide; 68P64114A51SLMF Help function on–line documentationSLMF CLI Reference; 68P09253A56SCDMA RFDS Hardware Installation; 68P64113A93S1X SC 4812T–Lite BTS Hardware Installation ; 68P64115A16S1X SC 4812T–Lite BTS FRU Guide ; 68P64115A17SSC4812T/T–Lite/ET/ET Lite Troubleshooting; 68P09253A65SCellular Glossary of Terms and Acronyms; 68P09213A951
Terms and Abbreviations 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT1-14Terms and AbbreviationsStandard and Non–standard Terms and AbbreviationsStandard terms and abbreviations used in this manual are defined inCellular Glossary of Terms and Acronyms; 68P09213A95. Anynon–standard terms or abbreviations included in this manual are listed inTable 1-2.Table 1-2: Non–Standard Terms and AbbreviationsTerm orAbbreviation Definition1X One of two bandwidths currently defined in the IS–2000 CDMA specification, whichextends the capability of the IS–95A and B specifications. 1X bandwidth provideswireless packet voice and data transmission capability at up to 144 Mbps.BBX–1X Broad Band Transceiver, 1X. Third generation BBX card with CDMA2000 1X packet aswell as IS–95A/B capability.BBX2 Broadband Transceiver, 2nd Generation supports IS–95A/BBBXR Redundant BBX for a CCP shelf or cage.CCD Clock Combining and Distribution. CCP shelf module which accepts timing signals fromthe active source and distributes them to other CCP shelf modules.CIO Combiner Input/Outputcompanion frame A BTS frame configured to operate at the same site with another companion frame.Companion frames may share antenna signals, but are not inter–connected on the sameLAN. Companion frames are managed as separate BTSs in the Base Station System(BSS).DBPF Dual Bandpass FilterDBM Debug MonitorDLM DownLoad Manager. Software application resident on the GLI card which permitsdownload of software upgrades from the Centralized Base Station Controller (CBSC) toBTSs without the need for a site visit.DMAC Digital Metering, Alarm, Control. Part of the Meter Alarm Panel (MAP) which providescontrol of and status information for the AC power rectifiers as well as back–up batterymonitoring and test capability. Term is used interchangeably with MAP (see below).DPLL Digital Phase–Locked LoopDRDC Duplexer, Receive Filter, Dual Directional Coupler. Provides duplexing of BTS transmitand receive signals to a single antenna and antenna signal sampling in either the forward(transmit) or reflected (receive) direction for use by an RF Diagnostic Subsystem(RFDS).EMPC Expansion Multi–coupler Preselector Card. BTS expansion frame MPC module which isused to receive, amplify, and distribute RX signals from the starter frame MPC.GLI2 Group Line Interface card, second generationHSO High Stability Oscillator. Module providing backup timing source for a BTS when thetiming signal from the GPS or Remote GPS module is unavailable.HSO2 HSO card, second generation. . . continued on next page1
Terms and Abbreviations68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT1-15Table 1-2: Non–Standard Terms and AbbreviationsTerm orAbbreviation DefinitionHSOX HSO Expansion. Module used in a BTS expansion frame to interface with the starterframe HSO or LFR and distribute the timing signals to the expansion frame CSMmodules.ISC In–Service Calibration. Technique for performing calibration sector by sector on a BTSto avoid completely removing the site from service.LPAC Linear Power Amplifier ControllerLFR2 Low Frequency Receiver, second generation. Low–cost LFR card with capability todistribute synchronization signals to multiple RF modem frames.MAP Meter Alarm Panel. SC4812ET Lite Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) which contains thefunctions of both the Temperature Compensation Panel (TCP) and the DMAC. Term isused interchangeably with DMAC.MCC8E Multichannel CDMA Card supporting 8 IS–95A/B channels.MCC24E Multichannel CDMA Card supporting 24 IS–95A/B channels.MCC–1X Multichannel CDMA Card supporting 16 or 48 CDMA2000 1X or (with SoftwareRelease 2.16.0.84.3 and higher) IS–95A/B channels.MPC Multi–coupler Preselector Card. BTS CCP shelf module used to amplify and distributeRX signals to BBX modules.NECB Network Element Configuration BaselineNECF Network Element Configuration FileNECJ Network Element Configuration JournalOLF Object List File. File containing a list of the ROM and RAM code versions which shouldbe operating on every device installed in a BTS. The file is resident on the Central BaseStation Controller (CBSC) Mobility Manager (MM) and is passed to the GLI after aDLM job is invoked. The GLI uses the OLF to determine which devices require codedownload to meet the OLF–specified version.PDA Power Distribution Assembly. Assembly in an SC4812ET Lite BTS providing internalDC power distribution and circuit protection.RFMF RF Modem FrameRGD Remote Global Positioning System (GPS) Distribution. Module which providesdistribution of digital timing information to up to four BTS RF modem frames (RFMFs)from a single Remote GPS receiver.RGPS Remote Global Positioning System. GPS receiver and signal distribution subsystemwhich provides digital timing information for up to four BTS RFMFs at a cell site.RGPS expansionprimary frame BTS frame where the RGD is located and which serves as the distribution point forRGPS digital timing signals to other (secondary) BTS frames at a cell site.RGPS expansionsecondary frame BTS frame which receives RGPS digital timing signals distributed from the primaryRGPS expansion frame at a cell site.RHSO Remote High–Stability Oscillator. Subsystem which generates and distributessynchronization signals from a single HSO to up to four RF modem frames.. . . continued on next page1
Terms and Abbreviations 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT1-16Table 1-2: Non–Standard Terms and AbbreviationsTerm orAbbreviation DefinitionSCCP Small CDMA Channel Processor. The type of CCP shelf used in the SC4812ET LiteBTS.TCP Temperature Compensation Panel. A function of the SC4812ET Lite MAP whichprovides the capability to adjust DC voltage output of the rectifiers to compensate forvariations resulting from temperature changes.TRDC Transmit & Receive Dual Directional Coupler (Non–duplexed, Receive Filter). TRDCscontains separate transmit and receive paths and bandpass filters which are not connectedelectrically. Transmit and receive antenna signals are not duplexed and must be handledby separate antennas. Each RF path contains a dual directional coupler on the antennaport which allows sampling of antenna signals in the forward (transmit) and reflected(receive) directions for use by an RFDS. 1
BTS Equipment Identification68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT1-17BTS Equipment IdentificationEquipment OverviewThe 1X SCt4812T–Lite BTS frame consists of a single cabinetcontaining RF and power amplifier components. The BTS may bepowered powered by:S220 Vac (rectified internally to +27 Vdc)S–48 Vdc (power converted internally to +27Vdc)S+27 VdcEach frame can support up to two carriers in a 3–sector configuration.Six–sector operation is not supported with any SC4812T Liteconfiguration.Figure 1-2 illustrates the external features of the BTS frame, the singlemajor component of the Motorola SC4812T Lite. The frame cabinet isidentical for starter and expansion frames except for the I/O interconnectplate.Frame ConfigurationsThe SC4812T Lite is available in starter and expansion frameconfigurations. Following are brief descriptions of each.Starter frame configuration supports one or two carriers, each withseparate antenna sets. It can operate as a stand–alone BTS, or can bemodified in the field to the expansion frame configuration.Expansion Frame configuration supports one or two carriers using 2:1TX combiners and a single antenna set for the frame. It operates with anSC4812T Lite starter frame which has its own antennas and differentcarriers. Expansion frames share RX signals to provide diversity RX forthe opposite frame. Expansion frames allow equipping a single SC4812TLite site with up to four carriers.Logical BTSThe BTS software implements the logical BTS capability. Previously, allBTS frames co–located at a single site had to be identified in thenetwork with separate and distinct BTS ID numbers. In the Logical BTSfeature, all frames located at a single BTS site are identified with uniqueFrame ID numbers (Frame ID Numbers 1, 101, 201, 301) under a single(site) BTS ID number. A logical BTS can consist of up to fourSC 4812T frames.When the LMF is connected to frame 1 of a logicalBTS, you can access all devices in all of the frames that make up thelogical BTS. A logical BTS requires a CDF/NECF file that includesequipage information for all of the logical BTS frames and their devicesand a CBSC file that includes channel data for all of the logical BTSframes.
BTS Equipment Identification 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT1-18Logical BTS NumberingThe first frame of a logical BTS has a –1 suffix (e.g., BTS–812–1).Other frames of the logical BTS are numbered with suffixes, –101, –201,and –301 (e. g. BTS–812–201). When you log into a BTS, a FRAMEtab is displayed for each frame. If there is only one frame for the BTS,there is only one tab (e.g., FRAME–282–1) for BTS–282. If a logicalBTS has more than one frame, there is a separate FRAME tab for eachframe (e.g. FRAME–438–1, FRAME–438–101, and FRAME–438–201for a BTS–438 that has three frames). If an RFDS is included in theCDF/NECF file, an RFDS tab (e.g., RFDS–438–1) is displayed.Actions (e.g., ATP tests) can be initiated for selected devices in one ormore frames of a logical BTS. Refer to the Select devices help screen forinformation on how to select devices.SCCP Shelf Card/Module Device ID NumbersAll cards/modules/boards in the frames at a single site, assigned to asingle BTS number, are also identified with unique Device ID numbersdependent upon the Frame ID number in which they are located. Refer toTable 1-3 and Table 1-4 and Figure 1-4 for specific device ID numbers.Table 1-3: SCCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Top Shelf)Card/Module ID Number (Left to Right)Frame #Power(PS–1) Power(PS–2) AMR–1 GLI2–1 MCC BBX BBX–R(Optional) MPC/EMPC–11 – – 1 1 1 2 1 2 3 R1 –101 – – 101 101 101 102 101 102 103 R101 –201 – – 201 201 201 202 201 202 203 R201 –301 – – 301 301 301 302 301 302 303 R301 –Table 1-4: SCCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Bottom Shelf)Card/Module ID Number (Left to Right)Frame # HSO/LFR CSM –1 CSM –2 CCD A CCD B AMR–2 GLI2–2 MCC BBX SW MPC/EMPC–21 – 1 2 – – – 2 2 3 4 4 5 6 – –101 –101 102 – – – 102 102 103 104 104 105 106 – –201 –201 202 – – – 202 202 203 204 204 205 206 – –301 –301 302 – – – 302 302 303 304 304 305 306 – –
BTS Equipment Identification68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT1-19Figure 1-2: 1X SCt4812T–Lite BTS FrameFor clarity, doors are not shown.Power SupplyModulesSCCPFan Moduleti-CDMA-WP-00213-v01-ildoc-ftwPowerBreakerPanelAmplifiersI/O InterconnectPlate
BTS Equipment Identification 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT1-20Internal Assemblies and FRUsThe BTS frame houses the fan modules, Small CDMA ChannelProcessor (SCCP) shelf, RF Power Amplifier modules, PA trunkingmodules, 2:1 combiners.RF filtering includes: DRF – Duplexers with TX Filter, RX Filter, andDiversity RX Filter and TRF – Non-Duplexed TX Filter, RX Filter, andDiversity RX Filter.Power system components include an AC Power Input/Filter, DC Filters,+27 Vdc Power Distribution Assembly (PDA).Figure 1-2 and Figure 1-3 show the location of the internal assembliesand Field Replaceable Units (FRU). A brief description of each item isfound in the following paragraphs.Figure 1-3: I/O Interconnect PlateFRONTSITE I/OLANCONNECTIONSGPS INHSO/LFRRF FILTERINGPOWER INPUT/DC FILTERETHERNET ROUTER (IF USED;OTHERWISE, FILLER PLATE)EXP FILLERPLATEREARSPAN I/Oti-CDMA-WP-00214-v01-ildoc-ftwALARMCONNECTORSPOWER INPUT/AC FILTERFILLER PLATEDC Power Distribution Assembly (PDA)Both rectifier output voltage and back–up battery voltage are routed tothe PDA (Figure 1-3) where they are combined into system DC busvoltage. The PDA provides distribution of DC power and system DCbus protection from the loads with MAIN BREAKER and the smallerpost–distribution circuit breakers. MAIN BREAKER permits removal ofall frame loading from the bus. The 13 post–distribution circuit breakerspermit removal of individual loads.
BTS Equipment Identification68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT1-21Filter/Combiner Shelf (Bandpass Filters or 2:1Combiners)The filter/combiner shelf (Figure 1-3) holds the transmit bandpass filtersor 2:1 combiners, depending on system configuration.Span I/O BoardThe span I/O board (Figure 1-3) provides the span line interface to theSCCP backplane.Small CDMA Channel Processor (SCCP) ShelfThe SCCP shelf has provisions for the following types and quantities ofmodules (Figure 1-3 and Figure 1-4):SAlarm Monitoring and Reporting (AMR) cards (2)SBroad Band Transceiver, second generation or 1X, (BBX2 orBBX–1X) cards, primary (6)SBBX2 or BBX–1X card, redundant (1)SCDMA Clock Distribution (CCD) cards (2)SClock Synchronization Manager (CSM) on two cards (one with GPSreceiver, if ordered)SCombiner Input/Output (CIO) card (1)SFan modules (2)SFiller panel (as required)SGroup Line Interface, second generation, (GLI2) cards (2)SHigh Stability Oscillator (HSO)/Low Frequency Receiver (LFR) card(Optional) (1)SMulti–coupler Preselector Cards (MPC) (2 per starter frame; 1 percompanion frame)SExpansion Multi–coupler Preselector Card (EMPC) (1 per companionframe)SMulti–Channel CDMA (MCC8E, MCC24E, or MCC–1X) cards (4)SPower supply cards (2)SSwitch card (1)
BTS Equipment Identification 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT1-22Figure 1-4: SCCP Shelfti-CDMA-WP-00222-v01-ildoc-ftw REFSC 4812T Lite CabinetMPC/EMPCCSMPower SupplyPower SupplyMPC/EMPCCSMCCD–1CCD–2AMRHSOAMRGLI GLIMCCMCCMCCMCCBBXBBXBBXBBXBBXBBXSWITCH19mm Filler PanelBBXCIOCCD CARD(S)(LOCATED BEHIND FILLER PANEL)SCCP SHELFFILLER POWER 1 POWER 2HSO/LFR CSM 1 CSM 2 CCD AMR GLI1 23 4MCC1 2 34 5 6BBX R1SWITCH121212MPC2:1 CombinersIn the SC4812T Lite BTS, one 2:1 combiner is used per sector tocombine the trunked LPA–amplified TX signals for two carriers into onesignal for input to the applicable sector DRDC or TRDC.
BTS Equipment Identification68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT1-23Transmit & receive, non–duplexed, Receive filter, DualDirectional Coupler (TRF)TRFs provide separate, bandpass–filtered sector transmit and receivepaths. When TRFs are used, separate transmit and receive antennas arerequired for each sector. As with DRFs, dual directional couplers foreach antenna path are incorporated in TRFs to permit signal monitoringby the RFDS.Figure 1-5: DRF and TRF DetailsDRFTRFSC4812ETL0005–4BTSCPLDTXRXANTCPLDTX BTSCPLDTX ANTCPLDTXRXRX ANTCPLDRX BTSCPLDRXANTENNATXANTENNADUPLEXEDTX & RX ANTENNA
BTS Equipment Identification 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT1-24SCCP Cage Configuration and 1X DevicesSC 4812T Lite frames have one SCCP cage which will support up tofour MCC cards and six BBX cards.MCC CardsA BTS may be configured with a mix of MCC–8E, MCC–24E, andMCC–1X cards. Any SCCP cage MCC card slot will support any of thethree MCC types. For 1X capability under R16.0, at least one MCC cardmust be an MCC–1X which can be installed in any MCC card slot. In aBSS operating with Software Release 2.16.0.84.3 and higher, MCC–1Xcards will support IS–95A and B traffic as well as CDMA2000 1X.When operating with Software Release 2.16.0.5x.x, the MCC–1X cardsdo not support IS–95A/B operation. For additional software releasecompatibility and capability information, contact the local Motorolaaccount team.BBX CardsUp to six BBX cards of mixed BBX2s and BBX–1Xs can also besupported. SCCP cage BBX2 card slots 1 through 6 are carrier– andsector–dependent. As a result, the BBX slots dedicated to the sectors forone carrier should be populated with the same type of cards. Refer toTable 1-6 for BBX card slot carrier and sector correlations.The SCCP cage R1 card slot is dedicated to the redundant BBX. Thisslot will support either a BBX2 or a BBX–1X. If a cage has BBX–1Xcarriers, the redundant BBX (BBXR) must be a BBX–1X card to provide1X redundancy.BBX–1X and BBX2 InterchangeabilityIn a BSS operating with R16.0 software, BBX–1X cards can be used asdirect replacements for BBX2 cards; however, different types of BBXsshould not be mixed on the same carrier. Therefore, if a BBX2 card isreplaced with a BBX–1X, all remaining BBX2 cards for the carriersupported by the replaced card must also be replaced with BBX–1Xcards.
BTS Sector Configurations68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT1-25BTS Sector ConfigurationsThere are a number of ways to configure the BTS frame. Table 1-5outlines the basic requirements. For more detailed information also seeTable 1-6, Figure 1-6 and Figure 1-7. Bandpass filters are used forsingle–carrier configurations and two–carrier systems when carriers areeither adjacent or not adjacentTable 1-5: BTS Sector ConfigurationNumber ofCarriers Numberof Sectors Channel Spacing Filter Requirements1 3 N/A Bandpass Filter or 2:1 Combiner2 3 Adjacent or Non–adjacent Bandpass Filter2 3 Non–adjacent 2:1 CombinerThe matrix in Table 1-6 shows the correlation between the various sectorconfigurations and BBX cards.
BTS Sector Configurations 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT1-26Table 1-6: Sector ConfigurationsConfiguration Description3–Sector / 1 CarrierThe configuration below maps RX and TX with bandpass filters for a 3–sector/1–carrier frame.1ANT 1A ANT 2A ANT 3A ANT 1B ANT 2B ANT 3B1TX1 / RX1A TX2 / RX2A TX3 / RX3A RX1B RX2B RX3B Carrier #BBX–1 BBX–2 BBX–3 BBX–1(diversity RX) BBX–2(diversity RX) BBX–3(diversity RX) 13–Sector / 1 CarrierThe configuration below maps RX and TX with 2:1 combiners for 3–sector/1–carrier frames incompanion configuration.ANT 1A ANT 2A ANT 3A ANT 1B ANT 2B ANT 3BTX1 / RX1A TX2 / RX2A TX3 / RX3A Carrier #2BBX–1 BBX–2 BBX–3 12NOTEDiversity RX (RX1B, 2B, and 3B) is received from the opposite companion frame through RXEXPANSION connectors 1B, 2B, and 3B.Diversity RX is provided to the opposite companion frame from antenna connectors 1A, 2A, and 3Athrough RX EXPANSION connectors 1A, 2A, and 3A.3–Sector / 2–ADJACENT or 2–NON–ADJACENT CarriersThe configuration below maps RX and TX with bandpass filters for 3–sectors/2–carriers for bothadjacent and non–adjacent channels.ANT 1A ANT 2A ANT 3A ANT 1B ANT 2B ANT 3B3TX1 / RX1A TX2 / RX2A TX3 / RX3A TX4 / RX1B TX5 / RX2B TX6 / RX3B Carrier #3BBX–1 BBX–2 BBX–3 BBX–1(diversity RX) BBX–2(diversity RX) BBX–3(diversity RX) 1BBX–4(RX) BBX–5(RX) BBX–6(RX) BBX–4(TX & diversityRX)BBX–5(TX & diversityRX)BBX–6(TX & diversityRX)23–Sector / 2–NON–ADJACENT CarriersThe configuration below maps RX and TX with 2:1 combiners for 3–sectors/2–carriers fornon–adjacent channels for frames in companion configuration.ANT 1A ANT 2A ANT 3A ANT 1B ANT 2B ANT 3BTX1 & 4 /RX1A & 4A TX2 & 5 /RX2A & 5A TX3 & 6 /RX3A & 6A Carrier #4BBX–1 BBX–2 BBX–3 14BBX–4 BBX–5 BBX–6 2NOTEDiversity RX (RX1B, 2B, 3B and RX4B, 5B, 6B) is received from the opposite companion framethrough RX EXPANSION connectors 1B, 2B, and 3B (see NO TAG or NO TAG).Diversity RX is provided to the opposite companion frame from antenna connectors 1A, 2A, and 3Athrough RX EXPANSION connectors 1A, 2A, and 3A.
BTS Sector Configurations68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT1-27Figure 1-6: SC4812T Lite Stand–alone PA Configuration with Bandpass FiltersNOTE See Table 1-6 Configuration Numbers 1 and 3.3–SectorBandpass FiltersCARRIER 1SECTOR 1, 2, 3CARRIER 2SECTOR 1, 2, 3Figure 1-7: SC4812T Lite Companion Frame LPA Configuration with 2:1 CombinersNOTE See Table 1-6 Configuration Numbers 2 and 4.SC4812ETL0011–43–Sector2:1 CombinersCARRIER 1SECTOR 1, 2, 3CARRIER 2SECTOR 1, 2, 3
BTS Sector Configurations 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT1-28Notes
Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT2-1Chapter 2Preliminary Operations2
Preliminary Operations: Overview 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT2-2Preliminary Operations: OverviewIntroductionThis section first verifies proper frame equipage against the site-specificdocumentation supplied for each BTS application. This includesverifying module placement, jumper, and dual in–line package (DIP)switch settings. Next, pre-power up and initial power-up procedures arepresented. Finally, power–down and normal power–up procedures arecovered.Cell–site TypesSites are configured as omni or up to 3–sectors – one or two carriers.Each type has unique characteristics and must be optimized accordingly.CDF/NECFThe Configuration Data File (CDF) or Network Element ConfigurationFile (NECF) contains site type and equipage data information and passesit directly to the LMF during optimization. The number of modemframes, number and types of BBX and MCC boards, and linear poweramplifier assignments are some of the equipage data included in theCDF/NECF.NOTE Be sure that the correct bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.cdffiles are used for the BTS. These should be the CDF/NECF filesthat are provided for the BTS by the CBSC. Failure to use thecorrect CDF/NECF files can cause system errors. Failure to usethe correct CDF/NECF files to log into a live (trafficcarrying) site can shut down the site.Site Equipage VerificationReview the site documentation. Match the site engineering equipage datato the actual boards and modules shipped to the site. Physically inspectand verify the equipment provided for the frame.CAUTION Always wear an approved anti–static wrist strap while handlingany circuit card/module to prevent damage by ESD. Afterremoval, the card/module should be placed on a conductivesurface or back into the anti–static packaging in which it wasshipped.2
Preliminary Operations: Overview68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT2-3Initial Installation of Boards/ModulesTable 2-1: Initial Installation of Boards/ModulesStep Action1Refer to the site documentation and, if it was not previously done, slide all boards and modules intothe appropriate shelves as required. DO NOT SEAT the boards and modules at this time.NOTEOn 800 MHz systems, the Switch Card has a configuration switch that must match the siteconfiguration (see Figure 2-1).2As the actual site hardware is installed, record the serial number of each module on a “Serial NumberChecklist” in the site logbook.Figure 2-1: 800 MHz Configuration Switch CardNOTE Configuration Switch (shown in Figure 2-1) is a feature on thenewer versions of the 800 Mhz switch card (some earlier cardsdo not have the switch). Configuration shown is for 3 SectorBTS. Switch 1 chooses BTS or MF. Switch 4 chooses 3–sectoror 6 sector. Switches 2 and 3 are not used.ti-CDMA-WP-00228-v01-ildoc-ftw REFSwitch Card1234ONBTSMF3 Sector6 SectorJ1J2J3J4J5SHIELDSConfigurationSwitch2
Preliminary Operations: Overview 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT2-4Setting Frame SCCP Configuration SwitchThe backplane configuration switch is located behind the frame rearaccess panel. It must be set for the frame type as shown in Figure 2-2.The switch setting must be verified and set before power is applied to theBTS equipment.Figure 2-2: Backplane DIP Switch SettingsONOFFSTARTERFRAMESETTINGONOFFEXPANSIONFRAME 1SETTINGBOTTOM / TOPRIGHT / LEFTMODEM_FRAME_ID_1MODEM_FRAME_ID_0BOTTOM / TOPRIGHT / LEFTMODEM_FRAME_ID_1MODEM_FRAME_ID_0REAR ACCESSPANELT–27 BUTTON HEAD ORT–30 PAN HEADTAMPER–RESISTANTFASTENER (14)Rear ofSC–4812T–Lite2
Ethernet LAN68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT2-5Ethernet LANEthernet LAN TerminationFor proper operation, each end of the primary and redundant BTSEthernet Local Area Networks (LAN) must be terminated with a50–ohm load. For a BTS consisting of a stand–alone or an expansionframe, this is done by placing 50–ohm triaxial terminations on the LANA and B external IN and OUT connectors.Check the LAN A and B external IN and OUT connectors on the I/Oplate of each frame (see Figure 2-3) and be sure terminations areinstalled on all the uncabled external LAN connectors.Figure 2-3: External Ethernet LAN ConnectorsFRONTLAN B IN CONNECTIONREARti-CDMA-WP-00214-v01-ildoc-ftw REFLAN B OUTCONNECTIONLAN A OUTCONNECTIONLAN A INCONNECTION2
Pre-Initial Power-up Tests 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT2-6Pre-Initial Power-up TestsIntroductionThe following information is used to check for any electrical shortcircuits and to verify the operation and tolerances of each frame at thesite before applying power for the first time. It contains instructionalinformation on the proper initial power up procedures for the SC4812TLite stand–alone and expansion frames for both the North Americanversion and the International version. If directions are different for eitherversion, they are called out within the procedure. Please pay attention toall cautions and warning statements in order to prevent accidental injuryto personnel.NOTE Unless otherwise noted, all procedures in this section are to befollowed for each frame at a site.Required ToolsThe following tools are used in the procedures.SClamp–on DC current probe (600 A capability with jaw size toaccommodate 2/0 cable).SDigital Multimeter (DMM) with standard 2mm (.080”) tip probesSHot Air Gun – (optional for part of the Alarm Verification)Cabling InspectionUsing the site-specific documentation generated by Motorola SystemsEngineering, verify that the following cable systems are properlyconnected:SReceive RF cabling – up to six RX cablesSTransmit RF cabling – up to six TX cablesSFor expansion frame installations, inter–frame RX diversity cabling –six RX cablesNOTE For DC power applications (+27 V):SThe positive power cable is red.SThe negative power cable is black. (The black power cable isat ground potential.)Initial Inspection and SetupTable 2-2: Initial Inspection and SetupStep Action1Be sure that the facility circuit breaker controlling external AC power supplied to the frame is set toOFF.2Verify that the external AC power supply is correctly connected to the ACLC input by performing theprocedure in Table 2-4. DC Power System Pre-power Application TestBefore applying any power to the BTS frame, follow the procedure inTable 2-3 to verify there are no shorts in the DC power distributionsystem.2
Pre-Initial Power-up Tests68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT2-7NOTE The procedure in Table 2-3 is required only on initial framepower–up or following maintenance when any major powercomponents (e.g., ACLC, DC PDA, Meter Alarm Panel) werereplaced or internal DC power cables were disconnected.Table 2-3: DC Power System Pre–Power Application TestStep Action1Physically verify all AC power to the BTS is OFF and all DC PDA circuit breakers (Figure 2-4) areset to OFF (pulled out).2On the DC PDA, set the MAIN BREAKER to the ON position by pushing it in. Resistance betweenthe MAP (–) VOLT TEST POINT and the (–) AMP TEST POINT should measure between 300 Ω.minimum 900 Ω. maximum.3Before proceeding, be sure the SCCP shelf power/converter modules PS1 and PS2 are correct byverifying that the locking/retracting tabs appear as follows:– (in +27 volt systems)! CAUTIONUsing the incorrect type of power/converter modules will damage the module, the SCCP shelf, andother modules installed in the SCCP shelf.4NOTEIn the following steps, if the DMM reads between 300 Ω minimum and 900 Ω maximum afterinserting any board/module, a low impedance problem probably exists in that board/module. Replacethe suspect board/module and repeat the test. If test still fails, isolate the problem before proceeding.Insert and lock the PS1 DC–DC converter module into its slot, and and turn ON the PS1 DC circuitbreaker on the DC PDA.5Resistance between the MAP (–) VOLT TEST POINT and the (–) AMP TEST POINT shouldtypically increase as capacitors charge, finally measuring between 300 Ω minimum and 900 Ω.maximum.6Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the PS2 converter module/circuit breaker and all other remaining modules inthe SCCP shelf.7On the DC PDA, set the PA 1A–1B circuit breaker to the ON position by pushing it in, and repeat step5.8Repeat step 7 for each of the three remaining PA circuit breakers.9Carefully reconnect each PA cable one at a time. Repeat step 5 after reconnecting each cable.– A typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as module inputcapacitors charge, finally indicating between 300 Ω minimum and 900 Ω. maximum.10 Set the Pilot Beacon, both Heat Exchanger, ETIB, and Options circuit breakers to ON one at a time.Repeat step 5 after pushing in each circuit breaker.11 Set all DC PDA circuit breakers to OFF (pulled out). 2
Pre-Initial Power-up Tests 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT2-8Figure 2-4: DC PDASC4812TL0009–3LPA1B 1D 3B 3D1A 1C 3A 3C PS1 PS2ETIBOPTIONS25 25HEATEXCHANGERCAUTIONSHUTOFFBOTHBREAKERSONLYDURINGHEATEXCHANGERMAINTENANCEORREPAIRLPABLOWERSPUSHBUTTONTORESETLPABLOWERSMAIN BREAKER30050 5010 1530 30 30 30 15PILOTBEACON2
Pre-Initial Power-up Tests68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT2-9External AC Power Connection VerificationFollowing verification of frame DC power system integrity, external ACpower connections must be verified. To accomplish this, the series of ACvoltage measurements specified in Table 2-4 is required.CAUTION Failure to properly connect the external AC power cable willdamage the surge protection module inside the ACLC.Table 2-4: AC Voltage MeasurementsStep Action1NOTEThis procedure is required only after external AC power wiring has been initially connected orremoved and reconnected to the frame.n WARNINGEnsure the frame is unpowered by setting the facility circuit breaker controlling external AC powersupplied to the frame to OFF.Physically verify all DC PDA circuit breakers are set to OFF (pulled out), and all battery shelf circuitbreakers are OFF (pulled out).2Open the ACLC circuit breaker access door, and set all ACLC circuit breakers to OFF (down).3Remove the four screws securing the ACLC front panel assembly, and remove the ACLC front panelassembly to gain access to the AC circuit breaker input terminals (NO TAG).4Apply external AC power to the frame by setting the facility circuit breaker to ON.5n WARNINGDo not perform the following steps while wearing an anti–static wrist strap. Serious personal injurycan result from accidently shorting high voltage or high current circuits to ground.! CAUTIONNorth AMERICAN Cabinet only:If the AC voltages measured in the following steps exceed 120 V when measuring from terminals L1or L2 to neutral or ground, STOP and DO NOT proceed until the cause of the higher voltages aredetermined. The frame will be damaged if the Main breaker is turned on with excessive voltage on theinputs.Measure the AC voltage from terminal L1 to neutral.North American Cabinet:– Voltage should be in the nominal range of 115 to 120 Vac.International Cabinet:– Voltage should be in the nominal range of 210 to 240 Vac.6Measure the AC voltage from terminal L1 to ground.North American Cabinet:– Voltage should be in the nominal range of 115 to 120 Vac.International Cabinet:– Voltage should be in the nominal range of 210 to 240 Vac.7Steps 7a through 7c apply to the North American cabinet only. If working on a International cabinetcontinue to step 8.. . . continued on next page2
Pre-Initial Power-up Tests 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT2-10Table 2-4: AC Voltage MeasurementsStep Action7a – Measure the AC voltage from terminal L2 to neutral on the North American cabinet.–– Voltage should be in the nominal range of 115 to 120 Vac.7b – Measure the AC voltage from terminal L2 to ground on the North American cabinet.–– Voltage should be in the nominal range of 115 to 120 Vac.7c ! CAUTIONIf the AC voltages measured (on the North American cabinet) in the following step exceeds 240 Vwhen measuring between terminals L1 and L2, STOP and DO NOT proceed until the cause of thehigher voltages are determined. The frame will be damaged if the Main breaker is turned on withexcessive voltage on the inputs.– Measure from terminal L1 to terminal L2.–– Voltage should be in the nominal range from 208 to 240 Vac.8Remove external AC power from the frame by setting the facility circuit breaker to OFF.9Install the ACLC front panel assembly and secure with the four screws removed in step 1.10 Apply external AC power to the frame by setting the facility circuit breaker to ON. 2
Applying AC Power68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT2-11Applying AC PowerOnce the external AC power connections are verified, AC power may beapplied internally to the frame. Table 2-5 provides the procedure forapplying internal AC power.Table 2-5: Applying Internal AC PowerStep Action1Be sure the requirements of Table 2-4 for AC input power connection verification have been met.2Be sure all DC PDA circuit breakers are set to OFF (pulled out), all ACLC front–panel circuitbreakers are OFF (down), and all battery shelf circuit breakers are OFF (pulled out).3Be sure the MAP power switch, TCP switch, and BATT TEST switch are all set to OFF.4If it has not already been done, set the facility circuit breaker supplying AC power to the frame to ON.5Set the ACLC MAIN circuit breaker ON.– For the North American cabinet:Observe that all eight (8) green LEDs on the front of the ACLC are illuminated (NO TAG).– For the International cabinet:Observe that all four (4) green LEDs on the front of the ACLC are illuminated (NO TAG).6On the ACLC, set RECT. 1/3 and then RECT. 2/4 branch circuit breakers ON. All the installedrectifier modules (NO TAG) will start up, and the green DC and PWR LEDs should light on each.7Set the MAP power switch to ON. The MAP VOLT display should read 27.4 + 0.2 VDC with theTCP switch OFF.! CAUTIONOnce power is applied to the MAP, be careful not to short either of the VOLT TEST POINTS toground. Failure to comply will result in severe damage to the MAP.8On the MAP, set the TCP switch (Figure 2-5) to ON. Verify no alarm LEDs are lighted on the MAP.NOTEDepending on battery compartment temperature, the rectifier voltage displayed on the MAP VOLTindicator may change by as much as +1.5 V when the TCP is set to on.9Check the rectifier current bar graph displays (green LED display on the rectifier module). Noneshould be lighted at this time.10 If batteries are fitted, set the ACLC HEATER circuit breaker to ON.NOTEThe GFCI AC circuit breaker should remain OFF unless the GFCI outlet is in use. 2
Applying AC Power 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT2-12Figure 2-5: Meter Alarm Panel (MAP)POWERSWITCHPOWERINDICATORTCPSWITCH VOLT TESTPOINTS25_C SETMASTERVOLTAGEADJ.BATT TESTSWITCHSC4812TL0015–2TO DISABLESENSOR FAILSENSOR 2SENSOR 1COMMDC Power Application and TestingTable 2-6 lists the step–by–step instructions for applying DC power andensuring the DC power system components are correctly functioning.Table 2-6: DC Power Application and TestsStep Action1Be sure all DC PDA and battery shelf circuit breakers are OFF (pulled out).2Be sure the procedures in Table 2-3 (if applicable) and Table 2-5 have been performed.3! CAUTIONWhen measuring voltage at the VOLT TEST POINTS, be careful not to short either of the test pointsto ground. Failure to comply will result in severe damage to the MAP.Measure voltage at the MAP VOLT TEST POINTS while pressing the 25° C SET button(Figure 2-5). The voltage should read 27.4 + 0.2 Vdc. Adjust with the MASTER VOLTAGE ADJ. onthe MAP, if necessary, to obtain an indicated 27.4+0.2 Vdc. Release the 25° C SET button.4Depending on the ambient temperature, the voltage reading may now change by up to + 1.5 Vcompared to the reading just measured. If it is cooler than 25_C, the voltage will be higher, and if it iswarmer than 25_C, the voltage will be lower.5Inside the battery compartment, measure the voltage between the cable connection point at the bottomof the + (red) battery bus bar and chassis ground, observing that the polarity is correct. The voltageshould be the same as the measurement in step 4.6Measure the voltage between the + (red) and – (black) battery bus bars in the battery compartment.Place the probe at the bottom of the bus bars where the cables are connected. The DC voltage shouldmeasure the same as in step 4.7Close (push in) DC PDA MAIN BREAKER.8On the DC PDA(Figure 2-4), set the PS1 and PS2 circuit breakers to the ON position by pushingthem in one at a time while observing the rectifier output current indicated on the MAP AMP display.– The display should indicate between 20 and 60 amps.. . . continued on next page2
Applying AC Power68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT2-13Table 2-6: DC Power Application and TestsStep Action9On the DC PDA), set the remaining circuit breakers to the ON position by pushing them in one at atime in the following sequence:1. PA (four circuit breakers, labeled 1A–1B through 3C–3D).2. HEAT EXCHANGER (two circuit breakers)3. ETIB4. PILOT BEACON5. OPTIONS10 Confirm that the MAP AMP display continues to indicate between 20 and 60 amps during the initialpower application.NOTENo battery charging or heavy RF loading is present at this point.11 If the frame is not equipped with the pilot beacon option, set the PILOT BEACON circuit breaker to OFF. Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries)Table 2-7 lists the step–by–step instructions for testing the batterycharging performance.Table 2-7: Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries)Step Action1Close the battery shelf circuit breakers (NO TAG) for connected batteries only. This process should becompleted quickly to avoid individual battery strings drawing excess charge currentNOTEIf the batteries are sufficiently discharged, the battery circuit breakers may not engage individuallydue to the surge current. If this condition occurs, disconnect the batteries from the 27Vdc bus bysetting the MAP power switch to OFF, and then engage all the connected battery circuit breakers.The MAP power switch should then be turned ON.2Using the clamp–on DC current probe and DMM, measure the current in each of the battery stringconnections to the battery bus bars. The charge current may initially be high but should quicklyreduce in a few minutes if the batteries have a typical new–battery charge level.. . . continued on next page2
Applying AC Power 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT2-14Table 2-7: Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries)Step ActionNOTEThe MAP AMP display will indicate the total current output of the rectifiers during this procedure.As an alternative, the bar graph meters on the AC rectifier modules can be used as a rough estimate ofthe total battery charge current. Each rectifier module bar graph has eight (8) LED elements torepresent the output current. Each illuminated LED element indicates that approximately 12.5% (1/8or 8.75 Amps) of an individual rectifier’s maximum current output (70 Amps) is flowing.RECTIFIER BAR GRAPH EXAMPLE:Question: A system fitted with three (3) rectifier modules each have three bar graph LED elementsilluminated. What is the total output current into the batteries?Answer: Each bar graph is indicating approximately 12.5% of 70 amps, therefore, 3 x 8.75 equals26.25 amps per rectifier. As there are three rectifiers, the total charge current is equal to (3 x 26.25 A)78.75 amps.This charge current calculation is only valid when the RF and PA compartment electronics are notpowered on, and the RF compartment heat exchanger is turned off. This can only be accomplished ifthe DC PDA MAIN BREAKER is set to OFF.3The current in each string should be approximately equal (within + 5 amps).4Allow a few minutes to ensure that the battery charge current stabilizes before taking any furtheraction. Recheck the battery current in each string. If the batteries had a reasonable charge, the currentin each string should reduce to less than 5 amps.5Recheck the DC output voltage. It should remain the same as measured in step 4 of the frame DCPower Application and Test (Table 2-6).NOTEIf discharged batteries are installed, the MAP AMP display may indicate approximately 288 amps fora two–carrier frame (four rectifiers) or 216 amps for a single–carrier frame (three rectifiers).Alternately, all bar graph elements may be lighted on the rectifiers during the charge test. Eitherindication shows that the rectifiers are at full capacity and are rapidly charging the batteries. It isrecommended in this case that the batteries are allowed to charge and stabilize as in the above stepbefore commissioning the site. This could take several hours. Battery Discharge TestPerform the test procedure in Table 2-8 only when the battery current isless than 5 Amps per string. Refer to Table 2-7 on the procedures forchecking current levels.Table 2-8: Battery Discharge TestStep Action1Turn the BATT TEST switch on the MAP ON (Figure 2-5). The rectifier output voltage and currentshould decrease by approximately 10% as the batteries assume the load. Alarms for the MAP mayoccur.2Measure the individual battery string current using the clamp–on DC current probe and DMM. Thebattery discharge current in each string should be approximately the same (within + 5 amps).3Turn BATT TEST switch OFF. 2
Applying AC Power68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT2-15CAUTION Failure to turn off the MAP BATT TEST switch before leavingthe site will result in low battery capacity and reduce battery life.Figure 2-6: Heat Exchanger Blower Assembly and Circuit BreakersCoreHeat ExchangerAssemblyBlowerPowerCordBottom (Ambient) BlowerFan ModuleT–30 ScrewMountingBracketDC PDAMountingBracketT–30 ScrewTop (Internal) BlowerFan ModuleBlowerPowerCordOUT=OFFIN=ONHeat ExchangerBlower AssemblyCircuit BreakerSide View SC4812TL0016–3LPA1B 1D 3B 3D1A 1C 3A 3C PS1 PS2ETIBOPTIONS25 25HEATEXCHANGERCAUTIONSHUTOFFBOTHBREAKERSONLYDURINGHEATEXCHANGERMAINTENANCEORREPAIRLPABLOWERSPUSHBUTTONTORESETLPABLOWERSMAIN BREAKER30050 5010 1530 30 30 30 15PILOTBEACON2
Power Removal 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT2-16Power RemovalIntroductionPower removal from an SC4812T Lite BTS frame is accomplished in thefollowing two–stage sequence:1. DC power removal2. AC power removalSome maintenance, upgrade, or other activities may only requireremoving DC power. In those situations where all power must beremoved from a frame, shutting down AC power will also be required.Remove DC PowerIf it becomes necessary to remove DC power from the frame, refer toFigure 2-4 and follow the procedure in Table 2-9.Table 2-9: DC Power RemovalStep Action1Set all DC PDA circuit breakers to OFF (pulled out) in thefollowing sequence:1. PA (four circuit breakers, labeled 1A–1B through 3C–3D)2. PILOT BEACON3. HEAT EXCHANGER (two circuit breakers)4. ETIB5. OPTIONS6. PS1 and PS27. MAIN BREAKER2n WARNINGThe surge capacitors in the DC PDA will store a largeelectrical charge for long periods of time. Failure to dischargethese capacitors as specified in this step could result in seriouspersonal injury or damage to equipment.On the DC PDA, set the PS1 and PS2 circuit breakers to ON(pushed in), and wait at least 30 seconds.3Set the DC PDA PS1 and PS2 circuit breakers to OFF.4Set the MAP power switch to OFF. 2
Power Removal68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT2-17AC Power RemovalIf it is necessary to remove all power from a frame, refer to NO TAG orNO TAG, and follow the procedure in Table 2-10.Table 2-10: AC Power RemovalStep Action1Remove DC power from the frame by following theprocedure in Table 2-9.2Set all ACLC circuit breakers to OFF (down) in the followingsequence:1. GFI2. HEATER3. RECT. 2/44. RECT. 1/35. MAIN3Set the facility circuit breaker controlling external power tothe frame to OFF. 2
Power Application – Normal Power–up 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT2-18Power Application – Normal Power–upPower Application ProceduresAfter the first power application, applying power to a BTS frame doesnot require performing the voltage and resistance measurements calledout in the initial power–up procedure. The only exception to this is aftermaintenance when any major power system components were replaced.Major power system components include:SACLCSDC PDASMAPSInternal DC power cablesNormal power application to a BTS frame is accomplished in thefollowing two–stage sequence:1. AC power application2. DC power applicationApplying Internal AC PowerTo apply AC power to a BTS frame, refer to NO TAG or NO TAG, andfollow the procedure in Table 2-11.Table 2-11: Apply AC Power to BTS FrameStep Action1If the external AC power leads for the BTS frame were disconnected and reconnected, perform theprocedure in Table 2-4 before proceeding further.2Be sure all DC PDA circuit breakers are set to OFF (pulled out), all ACLC front–panel circuitbreakers are OFF (down), and all battery shelf circuit breakers are OFF (pulled out).3Be sure the MAP power switch, TCP switch, and BATT TEST switch are all set to OFF (Figure 2-5).4If it has not already been done, set the facility circuit breaker supplying AC power to the frame to ON.5Set the ACLC MAIN circuit breaker ON.– For the North American cabinet:Verify that all eight (8) green LEDs on the front of the ACLC are illuminated (NO TAG).– For the International cabinet:Verify that all four (4) green LEDs on the front of the ACLC are illuminated (NO TAG).6On the ACLC, set RECT. 1/3 and then RECT. 2/4 branch circuit breakers ON.– All the installed rectifier modules (NO TAG) will start up, and the green DC and PWR LEDsshould light on each.NOTEIn a BTS configured for single–carrier operation (rectifier #4 not installed), a minor alarm may begenerated if the RECT. 2/4 circuit breaker is engaged before the RECT. 1/3 circuit breaker.. . . continued on next page2
Power Application – Normal Power–up68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT2-19Table 2-11: Apply AC Power to BTS FrameStep Action7Set the MAP power switch to ON.– The MAP VOLT display should read 27.4 + 0.2 VDC with the TCP switch set to OFF.! CAUTIONOnce power is applied to the MAP, be careful not to short either of the VOLT TEST POINTS toground. Failure to comply will result in severe damage to the MAP.8On the MAP, set the TCP switch (Figure 2-5) to ON.– Verify no alarm LEDs are lighted on the MAP.NOTEDepending on battery compartment temperature, the rectifier voltage displayed on the MAP VOLTindicator may change by as much as +1.5 V when the TCP is set to on.9Check the rectifier current bar graph displays (green LED display on the rectifier module).– None should be lighted at this time.10 If batteries are fitted, set the ACLC HEATER circuit breaker to ON.NOTEThe GFCI AC circuit breaker should remain OFF unless the GFCI outlet is in use. Apply DC PowerRefer to Figure 2-4 and follow the procedure in Table 2-12 to apply DCpower to a BTS frame.Table 2-12: Apply DC Power to BTS FrameStep Action1Be sure all DC PDA and battery shelf circuit breakers are OFF (pulled out).2If it has not already been done, apply AC power to the frame by following the procedure inTable 2-11.3Close (push in) DC PDA MAIN BREAKER.4On the DC PDA(Figure 2-4), set the PS1 and PS2 circuit breakers to the ON position by pushingthem in one at a time while observing the rectifier output current indicated on the MAP AMP display.– The display should indicate between 20 and 60 amps.5On the DC PDA), set the remaining circuit breakers to the ON position by pushing them in one at atime in the following sequence:1. PA (four circuit breakers, labeled 1A–1B through 3C–3D)2. HEAT EXCHANGER (two circuit breakers)3. ETIB4. (If Pilot Beacon option is installed) PILOT BEACON5. OPTIONS. . . continued on next page2
Power Application – Normal Power–up 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT2-20Table 2-12: Apply DC Power to BTS FrameStep Action6Confirm that the MAP AMP display continues to indicate between 20 and 60 amps during powerapplication.NOTENo battery charging or heavy RF loading is present at this point.7If the frame is equipped with back–up batteries, close (push in) the battery shelf circuit breakers(NO TAG) for connected batteries only. This process should be completed quickly to avoid excesscharge current draw by individual battery strings.NOTEIf the batteries are sufficiently discharged, the battery circuit breakers may not engage individuallybecause of surge current. If this condition occurs, disconnect the batteries from the 27Vdc bus bysetting the MAP power switch to OFF, and then engage all the connected battery circuit breakers. TheMAP power switch should then be turned ON. 2
Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-1Chapter 3Optimization/Calibration3
Introduction to Optimization and Calibration 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-2Introduction to Optimization and CalibrationOverviewThis section describes procedures for isolating the BTS from the spanlines, preparing and using the LMF, downloading system operatingsoftware, CSM reference verification/optimization, set up and calibrationof the supported test equipment, transmit/receive path verification, usingthe RFDS, and verifying the customer defined alarms and relay contactsare functioning properly.NOTE Before using the LMF, use an editor to view the “CAVEATS”section in the “readme.txt” file in the c:\wlmf folder for anyapplicable information.Optimization Process SummaryAfter a BTS is physically installed and the preliminary operations, suchas power up, have been completed, the LMF is used to optimize theBTS. Companion frames must be optimized individually as separateBTSs. The basic optimization process consists of the following:1. Download MGLI (GLI–bts#–1) with application code and data andthen enable MGLI.NOTE GLIs may be GLI2s or GLI3s.2. Use the LMF status function and verify that all of the installeddevices of the following types respond with status information:CSM, BBX, GLI, MCC8, and, if RFDS is installed, TSU orRFDS–1X RPROC. If a device is installed and powered up but isnot responding and is colored gray in the BTS display, the device isnot listed in the CDF file. The CDF/NECF file must be correctedbefore the device can be accessed by the LMF.3. Download device application code and data to all devices of thefollowing types:– CSM– BBX– Remaining GLI (GLI–bts#–2)– MCC4. Download the RFDS TSIC or RFDS–1X RPROC (if installed).5. Verify the operation of the GPS and HSO signals.6. Enable the following devices (in the order listed):– Secondary CSM (slot CSM 2)– Primary CSM (slot CSM 1)– All MCCs7. Using the LMF test equipment selection function, select the testequipment to be used for the calibration.8. Calibrate the TX and RX test cables if they have not previously beencalibrated with the LMF computer and software build which will beused for the optimization/calibration. Cable calibration values can beentered manually, if required.3
Introduction to Optimization and Calibration68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-39. Connect the required test equipment for a full optimization.10. Select all of the BBXs and all of the MCCs and use the fulloptimization function. The full optimization function performs TXcalibration, BLO download, TX audit, all TX tests, and all RX testsfor all selected devices.11. If the TX calibration fails, repeat the full optimization for any failedpaths.12. If the TX calibration fails again, troubleshoot and correct theproblem causing the failure, and repeat the full optimization for thefailed path.13. If the TX calibration and audit portion of the full optimization passesfor a path but some of the TX or RX tests fail, troubleshoot andcorrect the problem causing the failure, and run the individual testsas required until all TX and RX tests have passed for all paths.Cell-site TypesSites are configured as Omni/Omni or Sector/Sector (TX/RX).Sector/Sector sites are the three–sector configuration. The SC4812ETLite does not support six–sector operation. Each cell site type has uniquecharacteristics and must be optimized accordingly.NOTE For more information on the different in site types, please referto the applicable Hardware Installation manual.CDF/NECFThe CDF/NECF (Configuration Data File/Network ElementConfiguration File) contains information that defines the BTS and dataused to download files to the devices. A CDF/NECF file must be placedin the applicable BTS folder before the LMF can be used to log into thatBTS. CDF/NECF files are normally obtained from the CBSC using afloppy disk. A file transfer protocol (ftp) method can be used if the LMFcomputer has that capability. Refer to the LMF Help function on–linedocumentation for more information.The CDF/NECF includes the following information:SDownload instructions and protocolSSite specific equipage informationSSCCP shelf allocation plan– BBX equipage (based on cell–site type) including IS–95A/B orCDMA2000 1X capability and redundancy– CSM equipage including redundancy– Multi Channel Card 24E, 8E, or –1X (MCC24E, MCC8E, orMCC–1X) channel element allocation plan. This plan indicates howthe SCCP shelf is configured, and how the paging, synchronization,traffic, and access channel elements (and associated gain values) areassigned among the (up to 4) MCC24Es, MCC8Es, and/orMCC–1Xs in the shelf.SEffective Rated Power (ERP) table for all TX channels to antennasrespectively. Motorola System Engineering specifies the ERP of a3
Introduction to Optimization and Calibration 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-4transmit antenna based on site geography, antenna placement, andgovernment regulations. Working from this ERP requirement, antennagain and antenna feed line loss can be combined to calculate therequired transmit power at the frame antenna connections. Thecorresponding BBX output power required to achieve that power levelon any channel/sector can then be determined based on Bay LevelOffset (BLO) data established during the optimization process.NOTE Refer to Figure 3-1 and the LMF Help function on–linedocumentation for additional information on the layout of theLMF directory structure (including CDF/NECF file locationsand formats).BTS System Software DownloadBTS system software must be successfully downloaded to the BTSprocessor boards before optimization can be performed. BTS operatingcode is loaded from the LMF computer terminal.BTSs configured for Circuit Backhaul use bts.cdf files. BTSs configuredfor Packet Backhaul use bts.necf files (bts–xxx.xml) located on theOMC/R.NOTE Before using the LMF for optimization/ATP, the correctbts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf or bts–#.necf and cbsc–#.necf files forthe BTS must be obtained from the CBSC and put in a bts–#folder in the LMF. Failure to use the correct CDF/NECF filescan cause wrong results. Failure to use the correct CDF/NECFfiles to log into a live (traffic carrying) site can shut down thesite.The CDF/NECF is normally obtained from the CBSC on a DOSformatted diskette, or through a file transfer protocol (ftp) if the LMFcomputer has ftp capability. Refer to the LMF Help function on–linedocumentation for the procedure.Site Equipage VerificationIf you have not already done so, use an editor to view the CDF/NECF,and review the site documentation. Verify the site engineering equipagedata in the CDF/NECF matches the actual site hardware using aCDF/NECF conversion table.CAUTION – Use extreme care not to make any changes to theCDF/NECF content while viewing the file. Changes to theCDF/NECF can cause the site to operate unreliably orrender it incapable of operation.– Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strapwhile handling any circuit card/module to prevent damageby ESD. Extreme care should be taken during the removaland installation of any card/module. After removal, thecard/module should be placed on a conductive surface orback into the anti–static bag in which it was shipped.3
Preparing the LMF68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-5Preparing the LMFOverview of Packet BTS filesR16.0 and earlier releases had the configuration file called CDF for eachBTS and CBSC used by LMF. In 16.1 Packet BTS, BTS with GLI3booting in packet binary, the CDF is replaced by two new configurationfiles called Network Element Configuration Base (NECB) and NetworkElement Change Journal (NECJ). The NECB contains the baselineconfiguration and is analogous to the CDF, while the NECJ contains allthe changes made to the configuration since the last time the NECB wasre–generated. Once the NECJ gets to 80% of its maximum size, theNECB is re–generated and all the updates are rolled into it.These files play much broader and vital role than previous CDF files.GLI3 booting in circuit binaries works similar to R16.0.A few LMF related important facts about these files are listed below.SBoth files (NECB and NECJ) are in XML format.SNECB contains all the up-to-date static configuration information andNECJ contains all the recent changes (including operations) which arenot updated in the NECB.SBoth files can be viewed in any XML viewer (most easily available isInternet Explorer V5.0 and higher). They can be also viewed by anyother word processor, but the XML tags will also be seen with them.SThese files will be created by OMC–R from MIB as per the BTSprovisioning.SThese files will be regenerated for each software release upgrade onthe system for each BTS.SThese files will reside on both OMC–R and Packet–GLI3 (unlikeCDF) and will be synchronized periodically between them.SBoth NECB and NECJ file contain a “SoftwareVersion” field in theirheader section indicating the system release version of these files.SInstead of the bts#.cdf file, the packet LMF uses a bts#.XML file,which is a copy of the NECB.XML file.SPacket–GLI3 will need these files for site initialization.SThe scope of NECB has grown much broader than CDF and has muchmore BTS centric information. The use of generic version of thesefiles should be strictly avoided for the correct site initialization.3
Preparing the LMF 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-6LMF Features and Installation RequirementsBefore optimization can be performed, the LMF application softwaremust be installed and configured on a computer platform meetingMotorola–specified requirements (see Recommended Test Equipmentand Software in Chapter 1).NOTE For the LMF graphics to display properly, the computer platformmust be configured to display more than 256 colors. See theoperating system software instructions for verifying andconfiguring the display settings.Software and files for installing and updating the LMF are provided onCD ROM disks. The following items must be available:SLMF application program on CD ROMSCDF/NECF for each supported BTS (on diskette or available from theCBSC)SCBSC File for each supported BTS (on floppy disk or CD ROM)FTP ServerTo be able to download files to the GLI3, the LMF now runs FTP serveron the LMF laptop. The LMF FTP server runs from the LMFs homedirectory. All the files necessary to run the LMF FTP server are installedfrom the LMF CD. The FTP server is automatically started by the LMFupon successful Login to a Packet BTS.In addition, the LMF provides a new option in the Tools menu calledFTP Server. The option starts the LMFs FTP server if Start is selected,and stops the server if Stop is selected. The LMFs FTP server runs onport 21. If any other process is using that port, the error message isdisplayed to the user stating that the port is occupied. There is anotheroption under FTP Server menu called FTP Monitor, which allows theuser to watch FTP activity b/w the LMF and GLI.FirewallsFirewalls will block the FTP requests from the Packet GLI to the LMFlaptop. You must disable your firewall before attempting the BTS Synchcommand. Some common firewall programs to look for include NetworkICE, BlackICE, Norton’s Desktop Firewall, Enterprise Firewall, andPersonal Firewall.FTP Server Port in useOn some Windows 2000 installations, a process called “inetd.exe”makes the FTP server port 21 unusable by the LMF. If the LMF reportsthat the FTP server could not start because the port is in use, make surethe inetd.exe is not running by using the Task Manager’s process list. Ifinetd.exe is running, end the process by selecting it and clicking the“End Process” button. Inetd32.exe is NOT the same and ending it willnot resolve this problem.3
Preparing the LMF68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-7LMF File Structure OverviewThe LMF uses a <x>:\<lmf home directory> folder that contains all ofthe essential data for installing and maintaining the BTS. The followinglist outlines the folder structure for LMF. Except for the bts-nnn folders,these folders are created as part of the LMF installation. Refer to theCDMA LMF Operator’s Guide for a complete description of the folderstructure.Figure 3-1: LMF Folder Structureversion folder (A separate folder isrequired for each different version; forexample, a folder name 2.8.1.1.1.5.)loads folder(C:)x:\<lmf home directory> foldercdma foldercode folderdata folderBTS–nnn folders (A separate folder isrequired for each BTS where bts–nnn is theunique BTS number; for example, bts–163.)NOTE The “loads” folder and all the folders below it are not availablefrom the LMF for Software Release 2.16.1.x. These folders maybe present as as a legacy from previous software versions ordownloaded from the CBSC/OMC–R.3
Preparing the LMF 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-8LMF Home DirectoryThe LMF installation program creates the default home directory,c:\wlmf, and installs the application files and subdirectories (folders)in it. Because this can be changed at installation, the CDMA LMF homedirectory will be referred to with the generic convention of:<x>:\<lmf home directory>Where:<x> = the LMF computer drive letter where the CDMA LMF homedirectory is located.<lmf home directory> = the directory path or name where the CDMALMF is installed.3
Preparing the LMF68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-9NECF Filename Conventions and Directory LocationNECFThe NECF actually consists of two files: the NECB and NECJ. Thenaming convention for the NECB and NECJ is:NECB*bts#.xmlNECJ*bts#.xmlWhere:* = any characters can be substituted there# = the actual integer BTS numberThe NECB and its corresponding NECJ must have the exact same name,except for the “B” and “J” difference after the initial NEC characters.The NECB and the NECJ must reside in the<LMF_HOME>\cdma\bts–# directory corresponding to the BTS framethey are for.Load Information File (LIF)The LIF contains all the devices binaries available for the specifiedSystem Software Release. It is the functional equivalent of the OLF filethat was used pre–Packet.The naming convention for the LIF is:NE_LIF.xmlThe LIF must reside in the <LMF_HOME>\cdma\loads\<SoftwareRelease Number> directory, where <LMF_HOME> = the homedirectory in which the LMF is installed, usually C:\wlmf <SoftwareRelease Number> = the System Software Release Number (e.g.2.16.1.0.10).Cal FileThe Cal File still resides in the <LMF_HOME>\cdma\bts–# directoryand is named bts–#.cal, where # is the actual integer number of the BTS.3
Preparing the LMF 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-10LMF Installation and Update ProceduresThis section provides information and instructions for installing andupdating the LMF software and files.NOTE First Time Installation Sequence:1. Install Java Runtime Environment (JRE)2. Install U/WIN K–shell emulator3. Install LMF application programs4. Install/create BTS foldersNOTE Any time you install U/WIN, you must install the LMF softwarebecause the installation of the LMF modifies some of the filesthat are installed during the U/Win installation. Installing U/Winover–writes these modifications.There are multiple binary image packages for installation on theCD–ROM. When prompted, choose the load that corresponds tothe switch release that you currently have installed. Perform theDevice Images install after the WinLMF installation.If applicable, a separate CD ROM of BTS Binaries may beavailable for binary updates.Follow the procedure in Table 3-1 to install the LMF applicationprogram using the LMF CD ROM.Table 3-1: Install LMF using CD ROMnStep Action1Insert the LMF CD ROM disk into your disk drive and perform thefollowing as required:1a – If the Setup screen appears, follow the instructions displayed onthe screen.1b – If the Setup screen is not displayed, proceed to Step 2.2Click on the Start button3 Select Run.4 Enter d:\autorun in the Open box and click OK.NOTEIf applicable, replace the letter d with the correct CD ROM driveletter. 3
Preparing the LMF68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-11Copy BTS and CBSC CDF (or NECF) Files to the LMF ComputerBefore logging on to a BTS with the LMF computer to executeoptimization/ATP procedures, the correct bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf (orbts–#.necf and cbsc–#.necf) files must be obtained from the CBSC andput in a bts-# folder in the LMF computer. This requires creatingversions of the CBSC CDF files on a DOS–formatted floppy disketteand using the diskette to install the CDF files on the LMF computer.NOTE – If the LMF has ftp capability, the ftp method can be used tocopy the CDF or NECF files from the CBSC.– On Sun OS workstations, the unix2dos command can beused in place of the cp command (e.g., unix2dosbts–248.cdf bts–248.cdf). This should be done using a copyof the CBSC CDF file so the original CBSC CDF file isnot changed to DOS format.NOTE When copying CDF or NECF files, comply with the followingto prevent BTS login problems with the Windows LMF:SThe numbers used in the bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf (orbts–#.necf and cbsc–#.necf) filenames must correspond tothe locally-assigned numbers for each BTS and its controllingCBSC.SThe generic cbsc–1.cdf (or cbsc–#.necf) file supplied withthe Windows LMF will work with locally numbered BTSCDF files. Using this file will not provide a validoptimization unless the generic file is edited to replacedefault parameters (e.g., channel numbers) with theoperational parameters used locally.The procedure in Table 3-2 lists the steps required to transfer the CDFfiles from the CBSC to the LMF computer. For further information, referto the LMF Help function on–line documentation.Table 3-2: Copying CDF or NECF Files to the LMF ComputernStep ActionAT THE CBSC:1Login to the CBSC workstation.2Insert a DOS–formatted floppy diskette in the workstation drive.3 Type eject –q and press the Enter key.4 Type mount and press the Enter key.NOTESLook for the “floppy/no_name” message on the last line displayed.SIf the eject command was previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with a number.Use the explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed when performing step 7.5Change to the directory, where the files to be copied reside, by typing cd <directoryname>(e.g., cd bts–248) and pressing the Enter key.. . . continued on next page3
Preparing the LMF 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-12Table 3-2: Copying CDF or NECF Files to the LMF ComputernActionStep6 Type ls and press the Enter key to display the list of files in the directory.7 With Solaris versions of Unix, create DOS–formatted versions of the bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf (orbts–#.necf and cbsc–#.necf) files on the diskette by entering the following command:unix2dos <source filename> /floppy/no_name/<target filename>(e.g., unix2dos bts–248.cdf /floppy/no_name/bts–248.cdf).NOTESOther versions of Unix do not support the unix2dos and dos2unix commands. In these cases, usethe Unix cp (copy) command. The copied files will be difficult to read with a DOS or Windows texteditor because Unix files do not contain line feed characters. Editing copied CDF files on the LMFcomputer is, therefore, not recommended.SUsing cp, multiple files can be copied in one operation by separating each filename to be copiedwith a space and ensuring the destination directory (floppy/no_name) is listed at the end of thecommand string following a space (e.g., cp bts–248.cdf cbsc–6.cdf /floppy/no_name).8Repeat Steps 5 through 7 for each bts–# that must be supported by the LMF computer.9When all required files have been copied to the diskette type eject and press the Enter key.10 Remove the diskette from the CBSC drive.AT THE LMF:11 If it is not running, start the Windows operating system on the LMF computer.12 Insert the diskette containing the bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf (or bts–#.necf and cbsc–#.necf) files intothe LMF computer.13 Using MS Windows Explorer, create a corresponding bts–# folder in the <x>:\<lmf homedirectory>\cdma directory for each bts–#.cdf/cbsc–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf/cbsc–#.cdf) file pair copiedfrom the CBSC.14 Use MS Windows Explorer to transfer the bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf (or bts–#.necf and cbsc–#.necf)files from the diskette to the corresponding <x>:\<lmf home directory>\cdma\bts–# folders created inStep 13. 3
Preparing the LMF68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-13Creating a Named HyperTerminal Connection for MMI CommunicationConfirming or changing the configuration data of certain BTS FieldReplaceable Units (FRU) requires establishing an MMI communicationsession between the LMF and the FRU. Using features of the Windowsoperating system, the connection properties for an MMI session can besaved on the LMF computer as a named Windows HyperTerminalconnection. This eliminates the need for setting up connectionparameters each time an MMI session is required to supportoptimization.Once the named connection is saved, a shortcut for it can be created onthe Windows desktop. Double–clicking the shortcut icon will start theconnection without the need to negotiate multiple menu levels.Follow the procedures in Table 3-3 to establish a named HyperTerminalconnection and create a Windows desktop shortcut for it.Table 3-3: Create HyperTerminal ConnectionStep Action1From the Windows Start menu, select:Programs>Accessories>2Perform one of the following:SFor Win NT, select Hyperterminal and then click on HyperTerminal orSFor Win 98, select Communications, double click the Hyperterminal folder, and then double clickon the Hyperterm.exe icon in the window that opens.NOTESIf a Location Information Window appears, enter the required information, then click on theClose button. (This is required the first time, even if a modem is not to be used.)SIf a You need to install a modem..... message appears, click on NO.3When the Connection Description box opens:– Type a name for the connection being defined (e.g., MMI Session) in the Name: window,– Highlight any icon preferred for the named connection in the Icon: chooser window, and– Click OK.4From the Connect using: pick list in the Connect To box displayed, select COM1 or COM2 (WinNT) – or Direct to Com 1 or Direct to Com 2 (Win 98) for the RS–232 port connection and click OK.NOTEFor LMF computer configurations where COM1 is used by another interface such as test equipmentand a physical port is available for COM2, select COM2 in the following step to prevent conflicts.5In the Port Settings tab of the COM# Properties window displayed, configure the RS–232 portsettings as follows:SBits per second: 9600SData bits: 8SParity: NoneSStop bits: 1SFlow control: None. . . continued on next page3
Preparing the LMF 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-14Table 3-3: Create HyperTerminal ConnectionStep Action6 Click OK.7Save the defined connection by selecting:File > Save8Close the HyperTerminal window by selecting:File > Exit9Click the Yes button to disconnect when prompted.10 Perform one of the following:SIf the Hyperterminal folder window is still open (Win 98) proceed to step 12SFrom the Windows Start menu, select Programs > Accessories.11 Perform one of the following:SFor Win NT, select Hyperterminal and release any pressed mouse buttons.SFor Win 98, select Communications and double click the Hyperterminal folder.12 Highlight the newly–created connection icon by clicking on it.13 Right click and drag the highlighted connection icon to the Windows desktop and release the rightmouse button.14 From the popup menu which appears, select Create Shortcut(s) Here.15 If desired, reposition the shortcut icon for the new connection by dragging it to another location on theWindows desktop.16 Close the Hyperterminal folder window by selecting:File > Close 3
Span Lines – Interface and Isolation68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-15Span Lines – Interface and IsolationT1/E1 Span InterfaceNOTE At active sites, the OMC–R/CBSC must disable the BTS andplace it out of service (OOS). DO NOT remove the span linecable connectors until the OMC–R/CBSC has disabled the BTS.Each frame is equipped with one 50–pair punchblock for spans,customer alarms, remote GPS, and BTS frame alarms. See NO TAG andrefer to NO TAG for the physical location and punchdown locationinformation.Before connecting the LMF computer to the frame LAN, theOMC–R/CBSC must disable the BTS and place it OOS. This will allowthe LMF to control the BTS, and prevent the CBSC from inadvertentlysending control information to the BTS during LMF–based tests.Isolate BTS from T1/E1 Span(s)Once the OMC–R/CBSC has disabled the BTS, the span(s) must bedisabled to ensure the LMF will maintain control of the BTS. To disablethe spans, disconnect the BTS–to–CBSC Transcoder span cableconnectors from the Span I/O cards (Figure 3-2).Figure 3-2: Span I/O Board T1 Span Isolation50–PIN TELCOCONNECTORSREMOVEDSPAN B CONNECTOR(TELCO) INTERFACETO SPAN LINES (IF USEDSPAN A CONNECTOR(TELCO) INTERFACETO SPAN LINESTOP of Frame (Site I/O and Span I/O boards)RS–232 9–PIN SUB DCONNECTOR SERIALPORT FOR EXTERNALDIAL UP MODEMCONNECTION (IF USED)FW00299 REF3
Span Lines – Interface and Isolation 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-16T1/E1 Span IsolationTable 3-4 describes the action required for span isolation.Table 3-4: T1/E1 Span IsolationStep Action1Have the OMCR/CBSC place the BTS OOS.2To disable the span lines, locate the connector for the span orspans which must be disabled and remove the respectiveconnector from the applicable SCCP cage Span I/O board(Figure 3-2).3
LMF to BTS Connection68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-17LMF to BTS ConnectionConnect the LMF to the BTSThe LMF computer may be connected to the LAN A or B connectorlocated behind the frame lower air intake grill. Figure 3-3 below showsthe general location of these connectors. LAN A is considered theprimary LAN.Table 3-5: Connecting the LMF to the BTS nStep Action1To gain access to the LAN connectors, open the LAN cable access door, then pull apart the fabriccovering the BNC “T” connector and slide out the service tray, if desired (see Figure 3-3).2Connect the LMF computer to the LAN A (left–hand) BNC connector via PCMCIA Ethernet Adapter.NOTEXircom Model PE3–10B2 or equivalent can also be used to interface the LMF Ethernet connection tothe BTS frame connected to the PC parallel port, powered by an external AC/DC transformer. In thiscase, the BNC cable must not exceed 91 cm (3 ft) in length.* IMPORTANTThe LAN shield is isolated from chassis ground. The LAN shield (exposed portion of BNC connector)must not touch the chassis during optimization.Figure 3-3: LMF Connection Detail10BaseT/10Base2Converter ConnectsDirectly to BNC TLMF BNC “T” Connections onleft side of frame (Ethernet“A” shown; Ethernet “B”covered with hook–and–loopfabric)LMF ComputerTerminal with MousePCMCIA EthernetAdpater & EthernetUTP AdapterUniversal TwistedPair (UTP) cable(RJ11 connectors)115 VAC PowerConnectionNOTE:Open LAN CABLE ACCESS door.Pull apart hook–and–loop fabricand gain access to the LAN A orLAN B LMF BNC connector.ti-CDMA-WP-00232-v01-ildoc-ftwSC 4812T LITE3
Using the LMF 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-18Using the LMFBasic LMF OperationLMF Coverage in This Publication – The LMF application programsupports maintenance of both CDMA and SAS BTSs. All references tothe LMF in this publication are to the CDMA portion of the program.Operating Environments – The LMF application program allows theuser to work in the two following operating environments which areaccessed using the specified desktop icons:SGraphical User Interface (GUI) using the WinLMF iconSCommand Line Interface (CLI) using the WinLMF CDMA CLI iconThe GUI is the primary optimization and acceptance testing operatingenvironment. The CLI environment provides additional capability to theuser to perform manually controlled acceptance tests and audit theresults of optimization and calibration actions.Basic Operation – Basic operation of the LMF in either environmentincludes performing the following:SSelecting and deselecting BTS devicesSEnabling devicesSDisabling devicesSResetting devicesSObtaining device statusThe following additional basic operation can be performed in a GUIenvironment:SSorting a status report windowFor detailed information on performing these and other LMF operations,refer to the LMF Help function on–line documentation.NOTE Unless otherwise noted, LMF procedures in this manual areperformed using the GUI environment.
Using the LMF68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-19The LMF Display and the BTSBTS Display – When the LMF is logged into a BTS, a frame tab isdisplayed for each BTS frames. The frame tab will be labeled with“CDMA” and the BTS number, a dash, and the frame number (forexample, BTS–812–1 for BTS 812, RFMF 1). If there is only one framefor the BTS, there will only be one tab.CDF/NECF Requirements – For the LMF to recognize the devicesinstalled in the BTS, a BTS CDF/NECF file which includes equipageinformation for all the devices in the BTS must be located in theapplicable <x>:\<lmf home directory>\cdma\bts–# folder. To providethe necessary channel assignment data for BTS operation, a CBSC CDFfile which includes channel data for all BTS RFMFs is also required inthe folder.RFDS Display – If an RFDS is included in the CDF/NECF file, anRFDS tab labeled with “RFDS,” a dash and the BTS number–framenumber combination (for example, RFDS–812–1) will be displayed.Graphical User Interface OverviewThe LMF uses a GUI, which works in the following way:SSelect the device or devices.SSelect the action to apply to the selected device(s).SWhile action is in progress, a status report window displays the actiontaking place and other status information.SThe status report window indicates when the the action is completeand displays other pertinent information.SClicking the OK button closes the status report window.
Using the LMF 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-20Understanding GUI OperationThe following screen captures are provided to help understand how theGUI operates:– Figure 3-4 depicts the differences between packet and circuitCDMA “cdf” file identification. Note that if there is a packetversion “bts” file, the “(P)” is added as a suffix. There is acorresponding “(C)” for the circuit mode version.– Figure 3-5 depicts the Self-Managed Network Elements (NEs) stateof a packet mode SC4812T. Note that an “X” is on the front of eachcard that is under Self–Managed Network Elements (NEs) controlby the GLI3 card.– Figure 3-6 depicts three of the available packet mode commands.Normally the GLI3 has Self-Managed Network Elements (NEs)control of all cards as shown in Figure 3-5 by an “(X)”. In that statethe LMF may only status a card. In order to download code or test acard, the LMF must request Self-Managed Network Elements (NEs)control of the card by using the shown dropdown menu. It also usesthis menu to release control of the card back to the GLI3. The GLI3will also assume control of the cards after the LMF logs out of theBTS. The packet mode GLI3 normally is loaded with a tape releaseand NECB and NECJ files which point to a tape release stored onthe GLI3. When the GLI3 has control of a card it will maintain thatcard with the code on that tape release.– Figure 3-7 depicts a packet mode site that has the MCC–1 and theBBX–1 cards under LMF control. Notice that the “X” is missingfrom the front of these two cards.For detailed information on performing these and other LMF operations,refer to the LMF Help function on–line documentation.
Using the LMF68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-21Figure 3-4: BTS Login screen – identifying circuit and packet BTS files
Using the LMF 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-22Figure 3-5: Self–Managed Network Elements (NEs) state of a packet mode SC4812T
Using the LMF68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-23Figure 3-6: Available packet mode commands
Using the LMF 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-24Figure 3-7: Packet mode site with MCC–1 and BBX–1 under LMF control
Using the LMF68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-25Command Line Interface OverviewThe LMF also provides Command Line Interface (CLI) capability.Activate the CLI by clicking on a shortcut icon on the desktop. The CLIcan not be launched from the GUI, only from the desktop icon.Both the GUI and the CLI use a program known as the handler. Only onehandler can be running at one time. The architectural design is such thatthe GUI must be started before the CLI if you want the GUI and CLI touse the same handler.When the CLI is launched after the GUI, the CLI automatically finds anduses an in–progress login session with a BTS initiated under the GUI.This allows the use of the GUI and the CLI in the same BTS loginsession.If a CLI handler is already running when the GUI is launched (thishappens if the CLI window is already running when the user starts theGUI, or if another copy of the GUI is already running when the userstarts the GUI), a dialog window displays the following warningmessage:The CLI handler is already running.This may cause conflicts with the LMF.Are you sure that you want to start the application?This window also contains yes and no buttons. Selecting yes starts theapplication. Selecting no terminates the application.CLI Format ConventionsThe CLI command can be broken down in the following way:SVerbSDevice including device identifier parametersSSwitchSOption parameters consisting of:– Keywords– Equals sign (=) between the keyword and the parameter value– Parameter valuesSpaces are required between the verb, device, switch, and optionparameters. A hyphen is required between the device and its identifiers.Following is an example of a CLI command.measure bbx–<bts_id>–<bbx_id> rssi channel=6 sector=5Refer to the LMF CLI Commands for a complete explanation of the CLIcommands and their usage.
Using the LMF 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-26Logging Into a BTSLogging into a BTS establishes a communication link between the BTSand the LMF. An LMF session can be logged into only one BTS at atime.PrerequisitesBefore attempting to log into a BTS, ensure the following have beencompleted:SThe LMF is correctly installed on the LMF computer.SA bts-nnn folder with the correct CDF/NECF and CBSC files exists.SThe LMF computer was connected to the BTS before starting theWindows operating system and the LMF software. If necessary, restartthe computer after connecting it to the BTS in accordance withTable 3-5 and Figure 3-3.CAUTION Be sure that the correct bts–#.cdf/necf and cbsc–#.cdf file areused for the BTS. These should be the CDF/NECF files that areprovided for the BTS by the CBSC. Failure to use the correctCDF/NECF files can result in invalid optimization. Failure touse the correct CDF/NECF files to log into a live(traffic–carrying) site can shut down the site.BTS Login from the GUI EnvironmentFollow the procedures in Table 3-6 to log into a BTS when using theGUI environment.Table 3-6: BTS GUI Login ProcedurenStep Action1Start the LMF GUI environment by double–clicking on the WinLMF desktop icon (if the LMF isnot running).– An LMF window will open and display the LMF build number in the title bar.NOTEIf a warning similar to the following is displayed, select No, shut down other LMF sessions whichmay be running, and start the LMF GUI environment again:The CLI handler is already running.This may cause conflicts with the LMF.Are you sure you want to start the application?Yes No2Click on Login tab (if not displayed).3Double click on CDMA (in the Available Base Stations pick list).4Click on the desired BTS number.5Click on the Network Login tab (if not already in the forefront).6Enter correct IP address (normally 128.0.0.2) for a field BTS, if not correctly displayed in the IPAddress box.. . . continued on next page
Using the LMF68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-27Table 3-6: BTS GUI Login ProcedurenActionStep7Type in the correct IP Port number (normally 9216) if not correctly displayed in the IP Port box.8Click on Ping.– If the connection is successful, the Ping Display window shows text similar to the following:Reply from 128 128.0.0.2: bytes=32 time=3ms TTL=255– If there is no response the following is displayed:128.0.0.2:9216:Timed outIf the MGLI fails to respond, reset and perform the ping process again. If the MGLI still fails torespond, typical problems are shorted BNC to inter–frame cabling, open cables, crossed A and Blink cables, missing 50–Ohm terminators, or the MGLI itself.9Select the Multi-channel Preselector type from the Multi-channel Preselector drop–down list(default is MPC) to a device corresponding to your BTS configuration, if required.NOTE“Use a Tower Top Amplifier” is not applicable to the SC4812T Lite.10 Click on Login. (A BTS tab with the BTS and frame numbers is displayed.)NOTESIf an attempt is made to log into a BTS that is already logged on, all devices will be gray.SThere may be instances where the BTS initiates a log out due to a system error (i.e., a devicefailure).SIf the MGLI is OOS–ROM (blue), it must be downloaded with RAM code before other devicescan be seen.SIf the MGLI is OOS–RAM (yellow), it must be enabled before other installed devices can beseen.
Using the LMF 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-28BTS Login from the CLI EnvironmentFollow the procedures in Table 3-7 to log into a BTS when using theCLI environment.NOTE If the CLI and GUI environments are to be used at the sametime, the GUI must be started first and BTS login must beperformed from the GUI. Refer to Table 3-6 to start the GUIenvironment and log into a BTS.Table 3-7: BTS CLI Login ProcedurenStep Action1Double–click the WinLMF CLI desktop icon (if the LMF CLIenvironment is not already running).NOTEIf a BTS was logged into under a GUI session before the CLIenvironment was started, the CLI session will be logged into the sameBTS, and step 2 is not required.2At the /wlmf prompt, enter the following command:login bts–<bts#> host=<host> port=<port>where:host = MGLI card IP address (defaults to address last logged into forthis BTS or 128.0.0.2 if this is first login to this BTS)port = IP port of the BTS (defaults to port last logged into for thisBTS or 9216 if this is first login to this BTS)A response similar to the following will be displayed:LMF>13:08:18.882 Command Received and Accepted COMMAND=login bts–3313:08:18.882 Command In Progress13:08:21.275 Command Successfully Completed REASON_CODE=”No Reason”
Using the LMF68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-29Logging OutLogging out of a BTS is accomplished differently for the GUI and CLIoperating environments.NOTE The GUI and CLI environments use the same connection to aBTS. If a GUI and the CLI session are running for the same BTSat the same time, logging out of the BTS in either environmentwill log out of it for both. When either a login or logout isperformed in the CLI window, there is no GUI indication that thelogin or logout has occurred.Logging Out of a BTS from the GUI EnvironmentFollow the procedure in Table 3-8 to logout of a BTS when using theGUI environment.Table 3-8: BTS GUI Logout ProcedurenStep Action1Click on BTS in the BTS menu bar.2Click the Logout item in the pull–down menu (a Confirm Logoutpop-up message will appear).3Click on Yes (or press the Enter key) to confirm logout. The Logintab will appear.NOTEIf a logout was previously performed on the BTS from a CLI windowrunning at the same time as the GUI, a Logout Error pop–upmessage will appear stating the system could not log out of the BTS.When this occurs, the GUI must be exited and restarted before it canbe used for further operations.4If a Logout Error pop–up message appears stating that the systemcould not log out of the Base Station because the given BTS is notlogged in, click OK and proceed to Step 5.5 Select File > Exit in the window menu bar, click Yes in the ConfirmLogout pop–up, and click OK in the Logout Error pop–up whichappears again.6If further work is to be done in the GUI, restart it.NOTESThe Logout item on the BTS menu bar will only log you out of thedisplayed BTS.SYou can also log out of all BTS sessions and exit LMF by clickingon the File selection in the menu bar and selecting Exit from theFile menu list. A Confirm Logout pop–up message will appear.
Using the LMF 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-30Logging Out of a BTS from the CLI EnvironmentFollow the procedure in Table 3-9 to logout of a BTS when using theCLI environment.Table 3-9: BTS CLI Logout ProcedurenStep ActionNOTEIf the BTS is also logged into from a GUI running at the same timeand further work must be done with it in the GUI, proceed to Step 2.1Log out of a BTS by entering the following command:logout bts–<bts#>A response similar to the following will be displayed:LMF>13:24:51.028 Command Received and AcceptedCOMMAND=logout bts–3313:24:51.028 Command In Progress13:24:52.04 Command Successfully CompletedREASON_CODE=”No Reason”2If desired, close the CLI interface by entering the followingcommand:exitA response similar to the following will be displayed before thewindow closes:Killing background processes....
Using the LMF68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-31Establishing an MMI Communication SessionEquipment Connection – Figure 3-8 illustrates common equipmentconnections for the LMF computer. For specific connection locations onFRUs, refer to the illustration accompanying the procedures whichrequire the MMI communication session.Initiate MMI Communication – For those procedures which requireMMI communication between the LMF and BTS FRUs, follow theprocedures in Table 3-10 to initiate the communication session.Table 3-10: Establishing MMI CommunicationStep Action1Connect the LMF computer to the equipment as detailed in the applicable procedure which requiresthe MMI communication session.2If the LMF computer has only one serial port (COM1) and the LMF is running, disconnect the LMFfrom COM1 by performing the following:2a – Click on Tools in the LMF window menu bar, and select Options from the pull–down menu list.–– An LMF Options dialog box will appear.2b – In the LMF Options dialog box, click the Disconnect Port button on the Serial Connection tab.3Start the named HyperTerminal connection for MMI sessions by double clicking on its Windowsdesktop shortcut.NOTEIf a Windows desktop shortcut was not created for the MMI connection, access the connection from theWindows Start menu by selecting:Programs > Accessories > Hyperterminal > HyperTerminal > <Named HyperTerminalConnection (e.g., MMI Session)>4Once the connection window opens, establish MMI communication with the BTS FRU by pressingthe LMF computer <Enter>key until the prompt identified in the applicable procedure is obtained.
Using the LMF 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-32Figure 3-8: LMF Computer Common MMI ConnectionsNULL MODEMBOARD(TRN9666A)8–PIN TO 10–PINRS–232 CABLE(P/N 30–09786R01)RS–232 CABLE8–PINLMFCOMPUTERTo FRU MMI portDB9–TO–DB25ADAPTERCOM1ORCOM2FW00687Online HelpTask oriented online help is available in the LMF by clicking on Help inthe window menu bar, and selecting LMF Help from the pull–downmenu.
Pinging the Processors68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-33Pinging the ProcessorsPinging the BTSFor proper operation, the integrity of the Ethernet LAN A and B linksmust be verified. Figure 3-9 represents a typical BTS Ethernetconfiguration for an SC4812T Lite stand–alone or companion frame.The drawing depicts cabling and termination for both the A and BLANs.Ping is a program that sends request data packets to hosts on a network,in this case GLI modules on the BTS LAN, to obtain a response from the“target” host specified by an IP address.Follow the steps in Table 3-11 to ping each processor (on both LAN Aand LAN B) and verify LAN redundancy is working properly.CAUTION Always wear an approved anti–static wrist strap while handlingany circuit card/module to prevent damage by Electro–StaticDischarge (ESD).Figure 3-9: BTS Ethernet LAN Termination DiagramSIGNALGROUNDSIGNALGROUND50ΩINSIGNALGROUND50Ω50ΩSIGNALGROUND50ΩSIGNALGROUNDFRAME GROUNDTRIAXTERMINATORTRIAXTERMINATORTRIAXTERMINATORINOUTOUTSC4812TL0013–5TRIAXTERMINATORSC4812T- Lite I/O Interconnect Panel
Pinging the Processors 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-34NOTE The Ethernet LAN A and B cables and/or terminations must beinstalled on each frame/enclosure external LAN connector beforeperforming this test. All other processor board LAN connectionsare made through the backplanes.Table 3-11: Pinging the ProcessorsStep Action1If this is a first–time communication with a newly–installed frame or a GLI card which has beenreplaced, perform the procedure in Table 6-3 and then return to step 2.2Be sure any uncabled LAN A and B IN and OUT connectors in the power entry compartment (rear offrame – NO TAG and Figure 3-9) are terminated with 50 Ω loads.3If it has not already been done, connect the LMF computer to the BTS (refer to Table 3-5 andFigure 3-3.)4If it has not already been done, start a GUI LMF session and log into the BTS ( refer to Table 3-6).5In the power entry compartment, remove the 50Ω termination on the frame LAN B IN connector.– The LMF session should remain active.6Replace the 50Ω terminator on the BTS frame LAN B IN connector.7From the Windows desktop, click the Start button and select Run.8In the Open box, type ping and the MGLI IP address (for example, ping 128.0.0.2).NOTE128.0.0.2 is the default IP address for the GLI card in slot GLI–1 in field BTS units.9Click on OK.10 If the targeted module responds, a DOS window will appear with a display similar to the following:Reply from 128.0.0.2: bytes=32 time=3ms TTL=255– If the device responds, proceed to step 18.If there is no response, the following is displayed:Request timed out– If the GLI fails to respond, it should be reset and re–pinged. If it still fails to respond, typicalproblems would be: failure of the LMF to login, shorted BNC–to–inter-frame cabling, opencables, crossed A and B link cables, or the GLI itself.11 Logout of the BTS as described in Table 3-8, exit from the LMF program, and restart the Windowsoperating system on the LMF computer.12 Restart the LMF GUI program as described in LMF Help function on–line documentation, and log intothe BTS as described in Table 3-6.13 Perform steps 7 through 10 again.– If the device responds, proceed to step 18.If there is still no response, proceed to step 14.14 If ping was unsuccessful after restarting the LMF computer, press the MGLI front panel resetpushbutton and perform steps 7 through 10 again.NOTERefer to Table 6-1 if ping was unsuccessful after resetting the MGLI.. . . continued on next page
Pinging the Processors68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-35Table 3-11: Pinging the ProcessorsStep Action15 After the BTS has been successfully pinged, be sure the 50Ω termination was replaced on the BTSframe LAN B IN connector in the power entry compartment (Figure 3-9). Disconnect the LMF cablefrom the LAN shelf LAN A connector, and connect it to LAN B (right–hand connector) (refer toFigure 3-3).16 In the power entry compartment, remove the 50Ω termination on the BTS frame LAN A IN connector.17 Repeat steps 5 through 9 using LAN B.18 After the BTS has been successfully pinged on the secondary LAN, replace the 50Ω termination onthe frame LAN A IN connector in the power entry compartment.19 Disconnect the LMF cable from the LAN shelf LAN B and connect it to LAN A.20 Remove and replace the 50Ω termination on the LAN B IN connector to force the MGLI to switch toprimary LAN A.21 Repeat steps 5 through 9 to ensure proper primary LAN operation.
Download the BTS 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-36Download the BTSOverviewBefore a BTS can operate, each equipped device must contain deviceinitialization (ROM) code. ROM code is loaded in all devices duringmanufacture, factory repair, or, for software upgrades, from the CBSCusing the DownLoad Manager (DLM). Device application (RAM) codeand data must be downloaded to each equipped device by the user beforethe BTS can be made fully functional for the site where it is installed.ROM CodeDownloading ROM code to BTS devices from the LMF is NOT routinemaintenance or a normal part of the optimization process. It is onlydone in unusual situations where the resident ROM code release level inthe device is not compatible with the required release level of the siteoperating software and the CBSC can not communicate with the BTS toperform the download.If you must download ROM code, the procedures are located inAppendix G.Before ROM code can be downloaded from the LMF, the correct ROMcode file for each device to be loaded must exist on the LMF computer.ROM code must be manually selected for download.NOTE The ROM code file is not available for GLI3s. GLI3s are ROMcode loaded at the factory.ROM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After thedownload is started, the device being downloaded will change toOOS_ROM (blue). The device will remain OOS_ROM (blue) when thedownload is completed. A compatible revision–level RAM code mustthen be downloaded to the device. Compatible code loads for ROM andRAM must be used for the device type to ensure proper performance.The compatible device code release levels for the BSS software releasebeing used are listed in the Version Matrix section of the SCt CDMARelease Notes (supplied on the tape or CD–ROM containing the BSSsoftware).RAM CodeBefore RAM code can be downloaded from the LMF, the correct RAMcode file for each device must exist on the LMF computer. RAM codecan be automatically or manually selected depending on the Devicemenu item chosen and where the RAM code file for the device is storedin the LMF file structure. The RAM code file will be selectedautomatically if the file is in the <x>:\<lmf homedirectory>\cdma\loads\n.n.n.n\code folder (where n.n.n.n is thedownload code version number that matches the “NextLoad” parameterof the CDF file). The RAM code file in the code folder must have thecorrect hardware bin number for the device to be loaded.RAM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After thedownload is started, the device being loaded will change to OOS_ROM(blue). When the download is completed successfully, the device willchange to OOS_RAM (yellow).
Download the BTS68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-37When code is downloaded to an MGLI or GLI, the LMF automaticallyalso downloads data and then enables the MGLI. When enabled, theMGLI will change to INS_ACT (bright green). A redundant GLI willnot be automatically enabled and will remain OOS_RAM (yellow).When the redundant GLI is manually commanded to enable through theLMF, it will change state to INS_SBY (olive green).For non–GLI devices, data must be downloaded after RAM code isdownloaded. To download data, the device state must be OOS_RAM(yellow).The devices to be loaded with RAM code and data are:SMaster Group Line Interface (MGLI2 or MGLI3)SRedundant GLI (GLI2 or GLI3)SClock Synchronization Module (CSM) (Only if new revision codemust be loaded)SMulti Channel CDMA (MCC24E, MCC8E, or MCC–1X) cardsSBroadband Transceiver (BBX2 or BBX–1X) cardsSRFDS Test Subscriber Interface Card (TSIC) or RFDS–1X RFDSPROCessor (RPROC) card, if RFDS is installedNOTE The MGLI must be successfully downloaded with RAM codeand data, and in INS_ACT (bright green) status beforedownloading any other device. The RAM code downloadprocess for an MGLI automatically downloads data and thenenables the MGLI.
Download the BTS 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-38Verify GLI ROM Code LoadsDevices should not be loaded with a RAM code version which is notcompatible with the ROM code with which they are loaded. Beforedownloading RAM code and data to the processor cards, follow theprocedure in Table 3-12 to verify the GLI devices are loaded with thecorrect ROM code for the software release used by the BSS.PrerequisiteIdentify the correct GLI ROM code load for the software release beingused on the BSS by referring to the Version Matrix section of the SCtCDMA Release Notes (supplied on the tapes or CD–ROMs containingthe BSS software).Table 3-12: Verify GLI ROM Code LoadsStep Action1If it has not already been done, start a GUI LMF session and log into theBTS ( refer to Table 3-6).2Select all GLI devices by clicking on them, and select Device > Statusfrom the BTS menu bar.3In the status report window which opens, note the number in the ROMVer column for each GLI2.4If the ROM code loaded in the GLIs is not the correct one for the softwarerelease being used on the BSS, perform the following:4a – Log out of the BTS as described in Table 3-8 or Table 3-9, asapplicable.4b – Disconnect the LMF computer.4c – Reconnect the span lines as described in Table 5-7.4d – Have the CBSC download the correct ROM code version to the BTSdevices.5When the GLIs have the correct ROM load for the software release beingused, be sure the span lines are disabled as outlined in Table 3-4 andproceed to downloading RAM code and data.
Download the BTS68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-39Download RAM Code and Data to MGLI and GLIFollow the steps outlined in Table 3-13 to download the RAM code anddata to the MGLI and other installed GLI devices.PrerequisitesSPrior to performing these procedures, ensure a code file exists for eachof the devices to be loaded.SThe LMF computer is connected to the BTS (refer to Table 3-5), andis logged in using the GUI environment (refer to Table 3-6).Table 3-13: Download and Enable MGLI and GLI DevicesnStep Action1Be sure the LMF will use the correct software release for code anddata downloads by performing the following steps:1a – Click on Tools in the LMF menu bar, and select UpdateNextLoad > CDMA from the pull–down menus.1b – Click on the BTS to be loaded.–– The BTS will be highlighted.1c – Click the button next to the correct code version for the softwarerelease being used.–– A black dot will appear in the button circle.1d – Click Save.1e – Click OK to close each of the advisory boxes which appear.2Prepare to download code to the MGLI by clicking on the device.3 Click Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Download >Code/Data in the pull–down menus.– A status report is displayed confirming change in the device(s)status.4 Click OK to close the status window.– The MGLI will automatically be downloaded with data andenabled.5Once the MGLI is enabled, load and enable additional installed GLIsby clicking on the devices and repeating Steps 3 and 4.6 Click OK to close the status window for the additional GLI devices.
Download the BTS 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-40Download RAM Code and Data to Non–GLI DevicesDownloads to non–GLI devices can be performed individually for eachdevice or all installed devices can be downloaded with one action.NOTE – CSM devices are RAM code–loaded at the factory. RAMcode is downloaded to CSMs only if a newer softwareversion needs to be loaded.– When downloading to multiple devices, the download mayfail for some of the devices (a time–out occurs). Thesedevices can be loaded individually after completing themultiple download.Follow the steps in Table 3-14 to download RAM code and data tonon–GLI devices.Table 3-14: Download RAM Code and Data to Non–GLI DevicesnStep Action1Select the target CSM, MCC, and/or BBX device(s) by clicking onthem.2 Click Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Download >Code/Data in the pull–down menus.– A status report is displayed that shows the results of thedownload for each selected device.3 Click OK to close the status report window when downloading iscompleted.NOTEAfter a BBX, CSM, or MCC device is successfully loaded with RAMcode and data have changed to the OOS_RAM state (yellow), thestatus LED should be rapidly flashing GREEN.NOTEThe command in Step 2 loads both code and data. Data can bedownloaded without doing a code download anytime a device isOOS–RAM using the command in Step 4.4To download just the firmware application data to each device, selectthe target device and select: Device>Download>Data BBX Cards Remain OOS_ROMIf BBX cards remain OOS_ROM (blue) after power–up or followingcode load, refer to Table 6-7, Steps 9 and 10.
Download the BTS68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-41Selecting CSM Clock Source and Enabling CSMsCSMs must be enabled prior to enabling the MCCs. Procedures in thefollowing two sub-sections cover the actions to accomplish this. Foradditional information on the CSM sub–system, see “ClockSynchronization Manager (CSM) Sub–system Description” in the CSMSystem Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification section of this chapter.Select CSM Clock SourceA CSM can have three different clock sources. The Select CSM Sourcefunction can be used to select the clock source for each of the threeinputs. This function is only used if the clock source for a CSM needs tobe changed. The Clock Source function provides the following clocksource options.SLocal GPSSMate GPSSRemote GPSSHSO (only for source 2 & 3)SHSO ExtenderSLFR (only for source 2 & 3)S10 MHz (only for source 2 & 3)SNONE (only for source 2 & 3)PrerequisitesSMGLI is INS_ACT (bright green)SCSM is OOS_RAM (yellow) or INS_ACT (bright green)Follow the procedure in Table 3-15 to select a CSM Clock Source.Table 3-15: Select CSM Clock SourcenStep Action1Select the applicable CSM(s) for which the clock source is to beselected.2Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select CSM/MAWI >Select Clock Source... in the pull–down menu list.– A CSM clock reference source selection window will appear.3Select the applicable clock source in the Clock Reference Sourcepick lists. Uncheck the related check boxes for Clock ReferenceSources 2 and 3 if you do not want the displayed pick list item to beused.4Click on the OK button.– A status report is displayed showing the results of the operation.5Click on the OK button to close the status report window. NOTE For RF–GPS, verify the CSM configured with the GPS receiver“daughter board” is installed in the frame’s CSM 1 slot beforecontinuing.
Download the BTS 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-42Enable CSMsFollow the steps outlined in Table 3-16 to enable the CSMs installed inthe SCCP shelves.Table 3-16: Enable CSMsnStep Action1NOTEIf equipped with two CSMs, enable card in slot CSM 2 first.Click on the target CSM.2Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Enable in the pull–down menu list.– A status report is displayed showing the results of the enable operation.– Click OK to close the status report window.NOTE– The board in slot CSM 1 interfaces with the GPS receiver. The enable sequence for this board cantake up to one hour (see below).– FAIL may be shown in the status report table for a slot CSM 1 enable action. If Waiting For PhaseLock is shown in the Description field, do not cancel the enable process. The CSM will change tothe Enabled state after phase lock is achieved.* IMPORTANT– The GPS satellite system satellites are not in a geosynchronous orbit and are maintained andoperated by the United States Department of Defense (DOD). The DOD periodically alterssatellite orbits; therefore, satellite trajectories are subject to change. A GPS receiver that is INScontains an “almanac” that is updated periodically to take these changes into account.– If a GPS receiver has not been updated for a number of weeks, it may take up to an hour for theGPS receiver “almanac” to be updated.– Once updated, the GPS receiver must track at least four satellites and obtain (hold) a 3–D positionfix for a minimum of 45 seconds before the CSM will come in service. (In some cases, the GPSreceiver needs to track only one satellite, depending on accuracy mode set during the data load).NOTE– If two CSMs are installed and the board in slot CSM 1 has enabled, the LMF CSM cage viewshould show slot CSM 1 as bright green (INS–ACT) and slot CSM 2 as dark green (INS–SBY)– After CSMs have been successfully enabled, be sure the PWR/ALM LEDs are steady green(alternating green/red indicates the card is in an alarm state).3If more than an hour has passed without the board in slot CSM 1 enabling, refer to the CSM SystemTime – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification section of this chapter (see Table 3-18, Figure 3-10, andTable 3-19) to determine the cause.
Download the BTS68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-43Enable MCCsThis procedure configures the MCC and sets the “tx fine adjust”parameter. The “tx fine adjust” parameter is not a transmit gain setting,but a timing adjustment that compensates for the processing delay in theBTS (approximately 3 mS).Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-17 to enable the MCCs installed inthe SCCP shelves.NOTE The MGLI and primary CSM must be downloaded and enabled(IN–SERVICE ACTIVE), prior to downloading and enabling anMCC.Table 3-17: Enable MCCsnStep Action1If the GLI/MCC/BBX view is not displayed in the LMF window, clickon the GLI/MCC/BBX area of the SCCP shelf.2Click on the target MCC(s), or click on Select in the BTS menu bar,and select MCCs in the pull–down menu list.3Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Enable in thepull–down menu list.– A status report is displayed showing the results of the enableoperation.4 Click OK to close the status report window.
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-44CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO VerificationClock Synchronization Manager (CSM) Sub–system DescriptionOverview – Each BTS CSM sub–system features two CSM boards perRFMF. The primary function of the CSM cards is to maintain CDMAsystem time. GPS is used as the primary timing reference andsynchronizes the entire cellular system. In typical operation, the primaryCSM locks its Digital Phase Locked Loop (DPLL) circuits to GPSsignals. These signals are provided by either an on–board GPS receivermodule (RF–GPS) or a remote GPS receiver (RGPS). RGPS uses a GPSreceiver in the antenna head that has a digital output. The secondgeneration CSM card (CSM–II) is required when using the RGPS. ACSM–II card can also be equipped with a local GPS receiver daughtercard to support an RF–GPS signal.SCCP Shelf CSM Card Slot Assignments – The GPS receiver isinterfaced to the board in SCCP shelf slot CSM 1. This card is theprimary timing source, while the card in slot CSM 2 providesredundancy. The redundant card, does not have a GPS receiver.CSM–II Card Type Description – Each CSM–II card features atemperature–stabilized crystal oscillator that provides 19.6608 MHzclock, even second pulse, and 3 MHz reference signals to thesynchronization source selected from the following (refer to Table 3-19for source selection/verification procedures):SGPS: local/RF–GPS or remote/RGPSSLORAN–C Low Frequency Receiver (LFR) or High StabilityOscillator (HSO)SExternal reference oscillator sourcesCDMA Clock Distribution Card (CCD) Description – CCD cardsbuffer and distribute even–second reference and 19.6608 MHz clocksignals from the CSM cards. CCD 1 is married to the card in slot CSM1, and CCD 2 is married to the card in slot CSM 2.CSM Card Redundancy – The BTS switches between the primary andredundant units (card slots CSM 1 and CSM 2, respectively) upon failureor command. A failure in CSM 1 or CCD 1 will cause the system toswitch to the CSM 2–CCD 2 redundant card pair. GPS timingsynchronization is continually maintained between the primary andredundant CSM–CCD pairs.Secondary Timing References – The BTS may be equipped with aLORAN–C Low Frequency Receiver (LFR), a High Stability Oscillator(HSO), or external 10 MHz Rubidium source which the CSM can use asa secondary timing reference. Continuous GPS synchronization ismaintained for the LFR or HSO secondary timing references. The CSMmonitors and determines what reference to use at a given time.
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-45Timing Source Fault Management – Fault management has thecapability of switching between the GPS synchronization source and theLFR/HSO backup source in the event of a GPS receiver failure. Duringnormal operation, the card in slot CSM 1 selects GPS as the primarytiming source (Table 3-19). The source selection can also be overriddenvia the LMF or by the system software.Front Panel LEDsThe status of the LEDs on the CSM boards are as follows:SSteady Green – Master CSM locked to GPS or LFR (INS).SRapidly Flashing Green – Standby CSM locked to GPS or LFR(STBY).SFlashing Green/Rapidly Flashing Red – CSM OOS–RAM attemptingto lock on GPS signal.SRapidly Flashing Green and Red – Alarm condition exists. TroubleNotifications (TNs) are currently being reported to the GLI.
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-46Low Frequency Receiver/High Stability Oscillator (LFR/HSO)GeneralThe CSM and the LFR/HSO – The CSM performs the overallconfiguration and status monitoring functions for the LFR/HSO. In theevent of GPS failure, the LFR/HSO is capable of maintainingsynchronization initially established by the GPS reference signal.LFR – The LFR requires an active external antenna to receiveLORAN–C RF signals. Timing pulses are derived from this signal,which is synchronized to Universal Time Coordinates (UTC) and GPStime. The LFR can maintain system time indefinitely after initial GPSlock.HSO – The HSO is a high stability 10 MHz oscillator with the necessaryinterface to the CSMs. The HSO is typically installed in thosegeographical areas not covered by the LORAN–C system. Since theHSO is a free–standing oscillator, system time can only be maintainedfor 24 hours after 24 hours of GPS lockUpgrades and Expansions: LFR2/HSO2/HSOXThe LFR2 and HSO2 (second generation cards) both can export a timingsignal to other BTS frames located at a site. These secondary framesrequire an HSO–expansion (HSOX) module whether the primary framehas an LFR2 or an HSO2. The HSOX accepts input from the primaryframe and interfaces with the CSM cards in the secondary frames. LFRand LFR2 use the same source code in source selection (Table 3-19).HSO, HSO2, and HSOX use the same source code in source selection(Table 3-19).NOTE Allow the base site and test equipment to warm up for 60minutes after any interruption in oscillator power. CSM cardwarm-up allows the oscillator oven temperature and oscillatorfrequency to stabilize prior to test. Test equipment warm-upallows the Rubidium standard time base to stabilize in frequencybefore any measurements are made.
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-47CSM Frequency VerificationThe objective of this procedure is the initial verification of the ClockSynchronization Module (CSM) cards before performing the RF pathverification tests.Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-18 to set up test equipment.Table 3-18: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)Step Action1Perform one of the following as required by installed equipment:1a – For local GPS (RF–GPS): Verify a CSM card with a GPS receiver is installed in the primaryCSM slot, CSM 1, and that the card is INS_ACT (bright green).NOTEVerify by checking the card ejectors for kit number SGLN1145 on the card in slot CSM 1.1b – For Remote GPS (RGPS): Verify a CSM–II card is installed in primary slot CSM 1 and that thecard is INS_ACT (bright green).NOTEVerify by checking the card ejectors for kit number SGLN4132ED or subsequent.2Remove the card from slot CSM 2 (if installed) and connect a serial cable from the LMF COM 1 port(via null modem card) to the MMI port on the card in slot CSM 1 (see Figure 3-10).3Reinstall the card removed from slot CSM 2.4Start an MMI communication session with the card in slot CSM 1 by using the Windows desktopshortcut icon (see Table 3-10) .5When the terminal screen appears press the Enter key until the CSM> prompt appears.CAUTION In the power entry compartment, connect the GPS antenna to theRF GPS connector ONLY. Damage to the GPS antenna and/orreceiver can result if the GPS antenna is inadvertently connectedto any other RF connector.
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-48Figure 3-10: CSM MMI Terminal ConnectionNULL MODEMBOARD(TRN9666A)RS–232 SERIALMODEM CABLEDB9–TO–DB25ADAPTERCOM1LMFNOTEBOOKFW00372CSM card shownremoved from frame19.6 MHZ TESTPOINT REFERENCE(NOTE 1)EVEN SECONDTICK TEST POINTREFERENCEGPS RECEIVERANTENNA INPUTGPS RECEIVERMMI SERIALPORTANTENNA COAXCABLEREFERENCEOSCILLATOR9–PIN TO 9–PINRS–232 CABLENOTES:1. One LED on each CSM:Green = IN–SERVICE ACTIVEFast Flashing Green = OOS–RAMRed = Fault ConditionFlashing Green & Red = FaultGPS Initialization/VerificationPrerequisitesEnsure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:SThe primary CSM and HSO (if equipped) has been warmed up for atleast 15 minutes.SThe LMF computer is connected to the MMI port of the primary CSMas shown in Figure 3-10.SAn MMI communication session has been started (Table 3-10), andthe CSM> prompt is present in the HyperTerminal window(Table 3-18).Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-19 to initialize and verify properGPS receiver functioning.
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-49Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/VerificationStep Action1To verify that Clock alarms (0000), Dpll is locked and has a reference source, andGPS self test passed messages are displayed within the report, issue the following MMIcommandbstatus– The system will display a response similar to the following:Clock Alarms (0000):DPLL is locked and has a reference source.GPS receiver self test result: passedTime since reset 0:33:11, time since power on: 0:33:112Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to display the current status of the Loran and GPSreceivers:sources– When equipped with LFR, the system will generate a response similar to the following:N Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––0LocalGPS Primary 4 YES Good 00Yes1 LFR CHA Secondary 4 YES Good –2013177 –2013177 Yes2 Not UsedCurrent reference source number: 0– When equipped with HSO, the system will generate a response similar to the following:Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good 3 0 Yes1HSO Backup 4 No N/A timed–out* Timed–out* No*NOTE “Timed–out” should only be displayed while the HSO is warming up. “Not–Present” or“Faulty” should not be displayed. If the HSO does not appear as one of the sources, then configure theHSO as a back–up source by entering the following command at the CSM> prompt:ss 1 12After a maximum of 15 minutes, the Rubidium oscillator should reach operational temperature and theLED on the HSO should now have changed from red to green. After the HSO front panel LED haschanged to green, enter sources <cr> at the CSM> prompt. Verify that the HSO is now a valid sourceby confirming that the bold text below matches the response of the “sources” command.The HSO should be valid within one (1) minute, assuming the DPLL is locked and the HSO rubidiumoscillator is fully warmed.Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good 3 0 Yes1HSO Backup 4 Yes N/A xxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxx Yes. . . continued on next page
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-50Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/VerificationStep Action3HSO information (underlined text above, verified from left to right) is usually the #1 reference source.If this is not the case, have the OMCR determine the correct BTS timing source has been identified inthe database by entering the display bts csmgen command and correct as required using the editcsm csmgen refsrc command.NOTEIf any of the above areas fail, verify:– If LED is RED, verify that HSO had been powered up for at least 5 minutes. After oscillatortemperature is stable, LED should go GREEN Wait for this to occur before continuing !– If “timed out” is displayed in the Last Phase column, suspect the HSO output buffer or oscillatoris defective– Verify the HSO is FULLY SEATED and LOCKED to prevent any possible card warpage4Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above):– GPS information is usually the 0 reference source.– At least one Primary source must indicate “Status = good” and “Valid = yes” to bring site up.. . . continued on next page
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-51Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/VerificationStep Action5Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to verify that the GPS receiver is in tracking mode.gstatus– Observe the following typical response:24:06:08 GPS Receiver Control Task State: tracking satellites.24:06:08 Time since last valid fix: 0 seconds.24:06:08 24:06:08 Recent Change Data:24:06:08 Antenna cable delay 0 ns.24:06:08 Initial position: lat 117650000 msec, lon –350258000 msec, height 0 cm (GPS)24:06:08 Initial position accuracy (0): estimated.24:06:08 24:06:08 GPS Receiver Status:24:06:08 Position hold: lat 118245548 msec, lon –350249750 msec, height 20270 cm24:06:08 Current position: lat 118245548 msec, lon –350249750 msec, height 20270 cm(GPS)24:06:08 8 satellites tracked, receiving 8 satellites, 8 satellites visible.24:06:08 Current Dilution of Precision (PDOP or HDOP): 0.24:06:08 Date & Time: 1998:01:13:21:36:1124:06:08 GPS Receiver Status Byte: 0x0824:06:08 Chan:0, SVID: 16, Mode: 8, RSSI: 148, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:1, SVID: 29, Mode: 8, RSSI: 132, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:2, SVID: 18, Mode: 8, RSSI: 121, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:3, SVID: 14, Mode: 8, RSSI: 110, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:4, SVID: 25, Mode: 8, RSSI: 83, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:5, SVID: 3, Mode: 8, RSSI: 49, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:6, SVID: 19, Mode: 8, RSSI: 115, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:7, SVID: 22, Mode: 8, RSSI: 122, Status: 0xa824:06:08 24:06:08 GPS Receiver Identification:24:06:08 COPYRIGHT 1991–1996 MOTOROLA INC. 24:06:08 SFTW P/N # 98–P36830P 24:06:08 SOFTWARE VER # 8 24:06:08 SOFTWARE REV # 8 24:06:08 SOFTWARE DATE 6 AUG 1996 24:06:08 MODEL # B3121P1115 24:06:08 HDWR P/N # _ 24:06:08 SERIAL # SSG0217769 24:06:08 MANUFACTUR DATE 6B07 24:06:08 OPTIONS LIST IB 24:06:08 The receiver has 8 channels and is equipped with TRAIM.6Verify the following GPS information (shown above in underlined text):– At least 4 satellites are tracked, and 4 satellites are visible.– GPS Receiver Control Task State is “tracking satellites”. Do not continue until this occurs!– Dilution of Precision indication is not more that 30.Record the current position base site latitude, longitude, height and height reference (height referenceto Mean Sea Level (MSL) or GPS height (GPS). (GPS = 0 MSL = 1).. . . continued on next page
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-52Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/VerificationStep Action7If steps 1 through 6 pass, the GPS is good.NOTEIf any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify that:– If Initial position accuracy is “estimated” (typical), at least 4 satellites must be tracked andvisible (1 satellite must be tracked and visible if actual lat, log, and height data for this site hasbeen entered into CDF file).– If Initial position accuracy is “surveyed,” position data currently in the CDF file is assumed to beaccurate. GPS will not automatically survey and update its position.– The GPS antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.– GPS antenna connector center conductor measureS approximately +5 Vdc with respect to theshield.– There is no more than 4.5 dB of loss between the GPS antenna OSX connector and the BTS frameGPS input.– Any lightning protection installed between GPS antenna and BTS frame is installed correctly.8Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to verify that the CSM is warmed up and that GPSacquisition has taken place.debug dpllp Observe the following typical response if the CSM is not warmed up (15 minutes from application ofpower) (If warmed–up proceed to step 9)CSM>DPLL Task Wait. 884 seconds left.DPLL Task Wait. 882 seconds left.DPLL Task Wait. 880 seconds left. ...........etc.NOTEThe warm command can be issued at the MMI port used to force the CSM into warm–up, but thereference oscillator will be unstable.9Observe the following typical response if the CSM is warmed up.c:17486 off: –11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:–2013175,–2013175c:17486 off: –11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:–2013175,–2013175c:17470 off: –11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:–2013175,–2013175c:17486 off: –11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:–2013175,–2013175c:17470 off: –11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:–2013175,–2013175c:17470 off: –11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:–2013175,–201317510 Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above, from left to right):– Lower limit offset from tracked source variable is not less than –60 (equates to 3µs limit).– Upper limit offset from tracked source variable is not more than +60 (equates to 3µs limit).– TK SRC: 0 is selected, where SRC 0 = GPS.11 Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to exit the debug mode display.debug dpllp
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-53LORAN–C Initialization/VerificationTable 3-20: LORAN–C Initialization/VerificationStep Action Note1At the CSM> prompt, enter lstatus <cr> to verify that the LFR is in trackingmode. A typical response is:mode. A typical response is:CSM> lstatus <cr>LFR St ti St tLFR Station Status:Clock coherence: 512 >5930M 51/60 dB 0 S/N Flag:5930X 52/64 dn –1 S/N Flag:5990 47/55 dB –6 S/N Flag:7980M 62/66 dB 10 S/N FlThis must be greaterthan 100 before LFRbecomes a valid source.7980M 62/66 dB 10 S/N Flag:7980W 65/69 dB 14 S/N Flag: . PLL Station . >7980X 48/54 dB –4 S/N Flag:7980Y 46/58 dB –8 S/N Flag:E7980Z 60/67 dB 8 S/N Flag:8290M 50/65 dB 0 S/N FlagThis shows the LFR islocked to the selectedPLL station.8290M 50/65 dB 0 S/N Flag:8290W 73/79 dB 20 S/N Flag:8290W 58/61 dB 6 S/N Flag:8290W 58/61 dB 6 S/N Flag:8970M 89/95 dB 29 S/N Flag:8970W 62/66 dB 10 S/N Flag:8970X 73/79 dB 22 S/N Flag:8970X 73/79 dB 22 S/N Flag:8970Y 73/79 dB 19 S/N Flag:8970Z 62/65 dB 10 S/N Flag:9610M 62/65 dB 10 S/N Flg9610M 62/65 dB 10 S/N Flag:9610V 58/61 dB 8 S/N Flag:9610W 47/49 dB –4 S/N Flag:E9610W 47/49 dB –4 S/N Flag:E9610X 46/57 dB –5 S/N Flag:E9610Y 48/54 dB –5 S/N Flag:E9610Z 65/69 dB 12 S/N Flag9610Z 65/69 dB 12 S/N Flag:9940M 50/53 dB –1 S/N Flag:S9940W 49/56 dB –4 S/N Flag:E9940W 49/56 dB 4 S/N Flag:E9940Y 46/50 dB–10 S/N Flag:E9960M 73/79 dB 22 S/N Flag:9960W 51/60 dB 0 S/N Flag:9960W 51/60 dB 0 S/N Flag:9960X 51/63 dB –1 S/N Flag:9960Y 59/67 dB 8 S/N Flag:9960Z 89/96 dB 29 S/N Fl9960Z 89/96 dB 29 S/N Flag:LFR Task State: lfr locked to station 7980WLFR Recent Change Data:Search List: 5930 5990 7980 8290 8970 9940 9610 9960 >PLL GRI: 7980WLFR Master, reset not needed, not the reference source.CSM>This search list and PLLdata must match theconfiguration for thegeographical locationof the cell site.. . . continued on next page
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-54Table 3-20: LORAN–C Initialization/VerificationStep NoteAction2Verify the following LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type):– Locate the “dot” that indicates the current phase locked station assignment (assigned by MM).– Verify that the station call letters are as specified in site documentation as well as M X Y Zassignment.– Verify the S/N ratio of the phase locked station is greater than 8.3At the CSM> prompt, enter sources <cr> to display the current status of the the LORAN receiver.– Observe the following typical response.Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good –3 0 Yes1 LFR ch A Secondary 4 Yes Good –2013177 –2013177 Yes2 Not usedCurrent reference source number: 1*NOTE “Timed–out” should only be displayed while the LFR is warming up. “Not–Present” or“Faulty” should not be displayed. If the LFR does not appear as one of the sources, then configure theLFR as a back–up source by entering the following command at the CSM> prompt:ss 1 24LORAN LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type) is usually the #1 reference source(verified from left to right).* IMPORTANTIf any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify:– The LFR antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.– The antenna pre–amplifier power and calibration twisted pair connections are intact and < 91.4 m(300 ft) in length.– A dependable connection to suitable Earth Ground is in place.– The search list and PLL station for cellsite location are correctly configured .NOTELFR functionality should be verified using the “source” command (as shown in Step 3). Use theunderlined responses on the LFR row to validate correct LFR operation.5Close the HyperTerminal window.
Test Equipment Set-up68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-55Test Equipment Set-upConnecting Test Equipment to the BTSThe following types of test equipment are required to perform calibrationand ATP tests:SLMFSCommunications system analyzer model supported by the LMFSPower meter model supported by the LMF (required when using theHP 8921A/600 and Advantest R3465 analyzers)SNon–radiating transmit line termination loadSDirectional coupler and in–line attenuatorSRF cables and adaptersRefer to Table 3-21 for an overview of connections for test equipmentcurrently supported by the LMF. In addition, see the following figures:SFigure 3-14, Figure 3-15, and Figure 3-16 show the test setconnections for TX calibrationSFigure 3-17 through Figure 3-22 show the test set connections foroptimization/ATP testsTest Equipment GPIB Address SettingsAll test equipment is controlled by the LMF through an IEEE–488/GPIBbus. To communicate on the bus, each piece of test equipment must havea GPIB address set which the LMF will recognize. The standard addresssettings used by the LMF for the various types of test equipment itemsare as follows:SSignal generator address: 1SPower meter address: 13SCommunications system analyzer: 18Using the procedures included in the Verifying and Setting GPIBAddresses section of Appendix F, verify and, if necessary, change theGPIB address of each piece of employed test equipment to match theapplicable addresses above.
Test Equipment Set-up 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-56Supported Test EquipmentCAUTION To prevent damage to the test equipment, all transmit (TX) testconnections must be through a 30 dB directional coupler plus a20 dB in-line attenuator for both the 800 MHz and 1.9 GHzBTSs.IS–95A/B OperationOptimization and ATP testing for IS–95A/B sites or carriers may beperformed using the following test equipment:SCyberTestSAdvantest R3267 spectrum analyzer with R3562 signal generatorSAdvantest R3465 spectrum analyzer with R3561L signal generatorand HP–437B or Gigatronics Power MeterSAgilent E4406A transmitter test set with E4432B signal generatorSAgilent 8935 series E6380A communications test set (formerly HP8935)SHewlett–Packard HP 8921 (with CDMA interface and, for 1.9 GHz,PCS Interface) and HP–437B or Gigatronics Power MeterSSpectrum Analyzer (HP8594E) – optionalSRubidium Standard Timebase – optionalCDMA2000 1X OperationOptimization and ATP testing for CDMA2000 1X sites or carriers maybe performed using the following test equipment:SAdvantest R3267 spectrum analyzer with R3562 signal generatorSAgilent E4406A transmitter test set with E4432B signal generatorSAgilent 8935 series E6380A communications test set (formerly HP8935) with option 200 or R2K and with E4432B signal generator for1X FERTest Equipment PreparationSee Appendix F for specific steps to prepare each type of test set andpower meter to perform calibration and ATP .
Test Equipment Set-up68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-57Test Equipment Connection ChartsTo use the following charts to identify necessary test equipmentconnections, locate the communications system analyzer being used inthe COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER columns, and read downthe column. Where a dot appears in the column, connect one end of thetest cable to that connector. Follow the horizontal line to locate the endconnection(s), reading up the column to identify the appropriateequipment and/or BTS connector.IS–95A/B–only Test Equipment ConnectionsTable 3-21 depicts the interconnection requirements for currentlyavailable test equipment supporting IS–95A/B only which meetsMotorola standards and is supported by the LMF.Table 3-21: IS–95A/B–only Test Equipment InterconnectionCOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER ADDITIONAL TEST EQUIPMENTSIGNAL Cyber–Test AdvantestR3465 HP 8921A HP 8921W/PCS PowerMeter GPIBInterface LMFAttenuator&DirectionalCoupler BTSEVEN SECONDSYNCHRONIZATION EVENSEC REF EVEN SECSYNC INEVENSECONDSYNC INEVENSECONDSYNC IN19.6608 MHZCLOCK TIMEBASE INCDMATIME BASEINCDMATIME BASEINCDMATIME BASEINCONTROLIEEE 488 BUS IEEE488 GPIB GPIB SERIALPORTHP–IBHP–IBTX TESTCABLES RFIN/OUT INPUT50WTX1–6RFIN/OUT RFIN/OUT 20 DBATTEN. BTSPORTRX TESTCABLES RFGEN OUT RF OUT50WRX1–6DUPLEXOUT RF OUTONLYSYNCMON-ITORFREQMON-ITORHP–IB
Test Equipment Set-up 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-58CDMA2000 1X/IS–95A/B–capable Test EquipmentConnectionsTable 3-22 depicts the interconnection requirements for currentlyavailable test equipment supporting both CDMA 2000 1X andIS–95A/B which meets Motorola standards and is supported by theLMF.Table 3-22: CDMA2000 1X/IS–95A/B Test Equipment InterconnectionCOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMANALYZER ADDITIONAL TEST EQUIPMENTSIGNALAgilent8935(Option200 orR2K) AdvantestR3267 AgilentE4406AAgilentE4432SignalGen.AdvantestR3562SignalGenerator PowerMeter GPIBInterface LMFAttenuator&DirectionalCoupler BTSEVEN SECONDSYNCHRONIZATIONEVENSECONDSYNC IN EXT TRIGIN19.6608 MHZCLOCKEXT REFIN MOD TIMEBASE INCONTROLIEEE 488 BUS10 MHZOUTGP–IBHP–IB GP–IB GPIB SERIALPORTGPIB GPIBTX TESTCABLES RFIN/OUT INPUT50 WTX1–620 DBATTEN. BTSPORTSYNCMON-ITORFREQMON-ITORHP–IBPATTERNTRIG INEXT REFINRF INPUT50 WRX TESTCABLES RF OUT50 WRF OUTPUT50 WRX1–610 MHZ10 MHZ OUT(SWITCHED) SYNTHE REF IN10 MHZINTRIGGERINEXT TRIGSIGNAL SOURCECONTROLLEDSERIAL I/OSERIALI/O SERIALI/O10 MHZREFOUT*RFIN/OUT
Test Equipment Set-up68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-59Equipment Warm-upNOTE Warm-up BTS equipment for a minimum of 60 minutes prior toperforming the BTS optimization procedure. This assures BTSstability and contributes to optimization accuracy.– Time spent running initial or normal power-up,hardware/firmware audit, and BTS download counts aswarm-up time.WARNING Before installing any test equipment directly to any BTS TXOUT connector, verify there are no CDMA channels keyed.– At active sites, have the OMC-R/CBSC place the antenna(sector) assigned to the BBX under test OOS. Failure to doso can result in serious personal injury and/or equipmentdamage.Automatic Cable Calibration Set–upFigure 3-11 and Figure 3-12 show the cable calibration setup for the testsets supported by the LMF. The left side of the diagram depicts thelocation of the input and output connectors of each test equipment item,and the right side details the connections for each test. Table 3-26provides a procedure for performing automatic cable calibration.Manual Cable CalibrationIf manual cable calibration is required, refer to the procedures inAppendix F.
Test Equipment Set-up 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-60Figure 3-11: IS–95A/B Cable Calibration Test Setup – CyberTest, Agilent 8935, Advantest R3465, and HP 8921AMotorola CyberTestAdvantest Model R3465RF OUT 50ΩINPUT 50ΩRF GEN OUTANT INSUPPORTED TEST SETS100–WATT (MIN)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADTESTSETA. SHORT CABLE CALSHORTCABLEB. RX TEST CAL SETUP FOR TRDCTESTSETC. TX TEST AND DRDC RX TEST CAL SETUP20 DB IN–LINEATTENUATORCALIBRATION SET UPN–N FEMALEADAPTERTXCABLESHORTCABLENote: The 30 dB directional coupler is not usedwith the Cybertest test set. The TX cable isconnected directly to the Cybertest test set.A 10dB attenuator must be used with the short testcable for cable calibration with the CyberTest testset. The 10dB attenuator is used only for the cablecalibration procedure, not with the test cables forTX calibration and ATP tests.TESTSETRXCABLESHORTCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER (30 DB)N–N FEMALEADAPTER50 ΩΤERM.Agilent 8935 Series E6380A(formerly HP 8935)RFIN/OUTANTINHewlett Packard Model HP 8921ANote: For 800 MHZ only. The HP8921A cannotbe used to calibrate cables for PCS frequencies.TX CABLE FORTX TEST CABLECALIBRATIONRX CABLE FORDRDC RX TESTCABLE CALIBRATIONDUPLEXOUT ANTIN
Test Equipment Set-up68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-61Figure 3-12: IS–95A/B and CDMA 2000 1X Cable Calibration Test Setup –Agilent E4406A/E4432B and Advantest R3267/R3562TESTSETA. SHORT CABLE CALSHORTCABLEB. RX TEST SETUP FOR TRDCCALIBRATION SET UPTESTSETRXCABLESHORTCABLEN–N FEMALEADAPTERSUPPORTED TEST SETSINPUT 50 ΩRF OUT50 ΩAdvantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)NOTE:SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR ISCONNECTED TO 10 MHZ OUT ON REAR OF SPECTRUMANALYZERAgilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)NOTE:10 MHZ IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO10 MHZ OUT (SWITCHED) ON REAR OF TRANSMITTER TESTER(FIGURE F-16).RF INPUT50 ΩRF OUTPUT50 Ω100–WATT (MIN)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADTESTSETD. TX TEST SETUP AND DRDC RX TEST SETUP20 DB IN–LINEATTENUATORN–N FEMALEADAPTERTXCABLESHORTCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER (30 DB)50 ΩΤERM.TX CABLE FORTX TEST CABLECALIBRATIONRX CABLE FORDRDC RX TESTCABLE CALIBRATION
Test Equipment Set-up 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-62Figure 3-13: CDMA2000 1X Cable Calibration Test Setup – Agilent 8935/E4432B and Agilent E7495ATESTSETA. SHORT CABLE CALSHORTCABLEB. RX TEST SETUP FOR TRDCCALIBRATION SET UPTESTSETRXCABLESHORTCABLEN–N FEMALEADAPTERSUPPORTED TEST SETSAgilent E4432B (Top) and 8935 SeriesE6380A (Bottom)NOTE:10 MHZ IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO10 MHZ REF OUT ON SIDE OF CDMA BASE STATION TEST SET(FIGURE F-15).RF OUTPUT50 Ω100–WATT (MIN)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADTESTSETD. TX TEST SETUP AND DRDC RX TEST SETUP20 DB IN–LINEATTENUATORN–N FEMALEADAPTERTXCABLESHORTCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER (30 DB)50 ΩΤERM.TX CABLE FORTX TEST CABLECALIBRATIONRX CABLE FORDRDC RX TESTCABLE CALIBRATIONANTINAgilent E7495ARFOUTRFIN
Test Equipment Set-up68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-63Set-up for TX CalibrationFigure 3-14 and Figure 3-15 show the test set connections for TXcalibration.Figure 3-14: TX Calibration Test Setup –CyberTest (IS–95A/B) and Agilent 8935 (IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X)Motorola CyberTestAgilent 8935 Series E6380A (formerly HP 8935)TEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET UPFRONT PANELRFIN/OUTRFIN/OUTHP–IBTO GPIBBOXNOTE: THE 30 DB DIRECTIONAL COUPLER IS NOT USED WITH THECYBERTEST TEST SET. THE TX CABLE IS CONNECTED DIRECTLYTO THE CYBERTEST TEST SET.TOMPCTO PATRUNKINGMODULERS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSINTERNALTXCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANAGPIBRF IN/OUTRXANTENNACONNECTORFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMINTERNALRXCABLETXANTCPLDRXBTSCPLDTRDCTXBTSCPLDRXANTCPLDTXANTENNACONNECTORCOMMUNICATIONSSYSTEM ANALYZER2O DB IN–LINEATTENUATOR50 ΩTERM.TX TESTCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(30 DB)100–WATT (MIN.)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADTX TESTCABLE* BLACK RECTANGLESREPRESENT THE RAISEDPART OF SWITCHESNOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPEDWITH DRDCS (DUPLEXEDRX/TX SIGNALS), CONNECTTHE TX TEST CABLE TOTHE DRDC ANTENNACONNECTOR.POWERMETER(OPTIONAL)*POWERSENSOR* A POWER METER CAN BE USED INPLACE OF THE COMMUNICATIONSTEST SET FOR TX CALIBRATION/AUDIT
Test Equipment Set-up 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-64Figure 3-15: TX Calibration Test Setup – Using Power MeterTEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET UPNOTE: THE HP8921A AND ADVANTESTR3465 CANNOT BE USED FOR TXCALIBRATION. A POWER METER MUST BEUSED.TOMPCTO PATRUNKINGMODULERS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSINTERNALTXCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANARXANTENNACONNECTORFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMINTERNALRXCABLETXANTCPLDRXBTSCPLDTRDCTXBTSCPLDRXANTCPLDTXANTENNACONNECTOR50 ΩTERM.TX TESTCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(30 DB)100–WATT (MIN.)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADTX TESTCABLE* BLACK RECTANGLESREPRESENT THE RAISEDPART OF SWITCHESNOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPEDWITH DRDCS (DUPLEXEDRX/TX SIGNALS), CONNECTTHE TX TEST CABLE TOTHE DRDC ANTENNACONNECTOR.POWERSENSOR POWER METER2O DB IN–LINEATTENUATOR
Test Equipment Set-up68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-65Figure 3-16: TX Calibration Test Setup – Agilent E4406A and Advantest R3567 (IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X)TEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET UPTOMPCTO PATRUNKINGMODULERS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSINTERNALTXCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANAGPIBRF INPUT 50 ΩOR INPUT 50 ΩRXANTENNACONNECTORFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMINTERNALRXCABLETXANTCPLDRXBTSCPLDTRDCTXBTSCPLDRXANTCPLDTXANTENNACONNECTORCOMMUNICATIONSSYSTEM ANALYZER50 ΩTERM.TX TESTCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(30 DB)100–WATT (MIN.)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADTX TESTCABLE* BLACK RECTANGLESREPRESENT THE RAISEDPART OF SWITCHESNOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPEDWITH DRDCS (DUPLEXEDRX/TX SIGNALS), CONNECTTHE TX TEST CABLE TOTHE DRDC ANTENNACONNECTOR.POWERMETER(OPTIONAL)*POWERSENSOR* A POWER METER CAN BE USED INPLACE OF THE COMMUNICATIONSTEST SET FOR TX CALIBRATION/AUDITRF INPUT50 ΩAgilent E4406AINPUT 50 ΩAdvantest R32672O DB IN–LINEATTENUATOR
Test Equipment Set-up 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-66Set–up for ATPFigure 3-17 and Figure 3-18 show the test set connections for ATP tests.Figure 3-17: IS–95A/B ATP Test Set–up, TRDC Shown – CyberTest, Advantest R3465, and Agilent 8935Motorola CyberTestTEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UPRFIN/OUTSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDAdvantest Model R3465INPUT 50ΩGPIB CONNECTSTO BACK OF UNITNOTE: The 30 dB directional coupler is notused with the Cybertest test set. The TXcable is connected directly to the Cybertesttest set.RF OUT 50ΩFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDRF GENOUTSYNC MONITOR EVENSEC TICK PULSEREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDBNC“T”TO EXT TRIGGER CONNECTORON REAR OF TEST SET(FOR DETAILS, SEEFIGURE F-13)TOMPCTO PATRUNKINGMODULERS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSINTERNALTXCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANARX TESTCABLEGPIBRF IN/OUTORINPUT 50 ΩRF GEN OUT,RF OUT 50Ω,OR RF IN/OUTRXANTENNACONNECTORFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMINTERNALRXCABLETXANTCPLDRXBTSCPLDTRDCTXBTSCPLDRXANTCPLDTXANTENNACONNECTORCOMMUNICATIONSSYSTEM ANALYZER50 ΩTERM.TX TESTCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(30 DB)100–WATT (MIN.)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADTX TESTCABLE* BLACK RECTANGLESREPRESENT THE RAISEDPART OF SWITCHESCDMATIMEBASEINEVENSECOND/SYNC INNOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPEDWITH DRDCS (DUPLEXED RX/TXSIGNALS), BOTH THE TX AND RXTEST CABLES CONNECT TO THEDRDC ANTENNA CONNECTOR.(SEE FIGURE 3-19.)2O DB IN–LINEATTENUATORIMPORTANT:WHEN PERFORMING FER TEST ON COMPANION FRAME DIVERSITY RX, CONNECTRX TEST CABLE TO RX ANTENNA PORT ON COLLOCATED COMPANION FRAME.Agilent 8935 Series E6380A (formerly HP 8935)RF IN/OUTHP–IBTO GPIBBOXSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARD10 MHZREF OUT
Test Equipment Set-up68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-67Figure 3-18: IS–95A/B ATP Test Setup – HP 8921ARF OUTONLYHewlett Packard Model HP 8921A W/PCS Interface(for 1900 MHz)GPIBCONNECTSTO BACK OFUNITSSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDTEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UPRFIN/OUTGPIBCONNECTSTO BACK OFUNITSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDHewlett Packard Model HP 8921A(for 800 MHz)RFIN/OUTDUPLEXOUTTOMPCTO PATRUNKINGMODULERS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSINTERNALTXCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANARX TESTCABLEGPIBPCS INTERFACEINPUT/OUTPUTPORTSRXANTENNACONNECTORFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMINTERNALRXCABLETXANTCPLDRXBTSCPLDTRDCTXBTSCPLDRXANTCPLDTXANTENNACONNECTORCOMMUNICATIONSSYSTEM ANALYZER50 ΩTERM.TX TESTCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(30 DB)100–WATT (MIN.)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADTX TESTCABLE* BLACK RECTANGLESREPRESENT THE RAISEDPART OF SWITCHESCDMATIMEBASEIN EVENSECOND/SYNC INNOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPEDWITH DRDCS (DUPLEXEDRX/TX SIGNALS), BOTH THETX AND RX TEST CABLESCONNECT TO THE DRDCANTENNA CONNECTOR.(SEE FIGURE 3-19.)HP PCSINTERFACE*2O DB IN–LINEATTENUATOR* FOR 1900 MHZONLYRF OUT ONLYRF IN/OUTNOTE:FOR 800 MHZ TESTING, CONNECT CABLES TO THEHP 8921A AS FOLLOWS:RX TEST CABLE TO DUPLEX OUTTX TEST CABLE TO RF IN/OUTIMPORTANT:WHEN PERFORMING FER TEST ON COMPANION FRAME DIVERSITY RX,CONNECT RX TEST CABLE TO RX ANTENNA PORT ON COLLOCATED COMPANIONFRAME.
Test Equipment Set-up 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-68Figure 3-19: IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X ATP Test Setup With DRDCs – Agilent Test EquipmentTEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UPRF INPUT50 ΩRFOUTPUT50 ΩAgilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)FREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDBNC“T”TO TRIGGER INON REAR OFTRANSMITTERTESTERTO PATTERN TRIG INON REAR OF SIGNALGENERATORTO EXT REF IN ON REAR OFTRANSMITTERTESTER NOTE:10 MHZ IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO10 MHZ OUT (SWITCHED) ON REAR OF TRANSMITTER TESTER(SEE FIGURE F-16).TOMPCTO PATRUNKINGMODULERS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSINTERNALTXCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS *10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANACOMMUNICATIONSSYSTEM ANALYZERHP–IBORGPIBFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMINTERNALRXCABLEDRDCBTSCPLDANTCPLDSIGNAL GENERATORGPIB10 MHZIN10 MHZREF OUTOR10 MHZOUTTRIGGER INOREVEN SECSYNCH INEXTREFINBNC“T”PATTERNTRIG IN* BLACK RECTANGLESREPRESENT THE RAISEDPART OF SWITCHESDUPLEXEDTX/RXANTENNACONNECTORRX TESTCABLE50 ΩTERM.TX TESTCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(30 DB)100–WATT (MIN.)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADTX TESTCABLE2O DB IN–LINEATTENUATORRF IN/OUTORRF INPUT50 ΩRF OUTPUT 50 ΩIMPORTANT:WHEN PERFORMING FER TEST ONCOMPANION FRAME DIVERSITY RX,CONNECT RX TEST CABLE TOANTENNA PORT ON COLLOCATEDCOMPANION FRAME.Agilent E4432B (Top) and 8935 Series E6380A(Bottom)SYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDRFOUTPUT50 ΩNOTES:10 MHZ IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO10 MHZ REF OUT ON SIDE OF CDMA BASE STATION TEST SET PATTERN TRIG IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR ISCONNECTED TO EVEN SECOND SYNC IN ON SIDE OF CDMA BASESTATION TEST SET.(SEE FIGURE F-15)RFIN/OUTBNC“T”
Test Equipment Set-up68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-69Figure 3-20: IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X ATP Test Setup With DRDCs – Advantest R3267/3562 Test EquipmentTEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UPINPUT 50 ΩRF OUT50 ΩAdvantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)FREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDBNC“T”NOTE:SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR ISCONNECTED TO 10 MHZ REF OUT ON REAR OFSPECTRUM ANALYZER (SEE FIGURE F-17)TO EXT TRIG ON REAR OFSPECTRUMANALYZERTOMPCTO PATRUNKINGMODULERS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSINTERNALTXCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANAINPUT50 ΩRF OUT50 ΩFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMINTERNALRXCABLEDRDCBTSCPLDANTCPLDBNC“T”SPECTRUMANALYZERGPIBSIGNAL GENERATORGPIBSYNTHEREFIN10 MHZOUTEXTTRIG INMOD TIMEBASE INEXT TRIG* BLACK RECTANGLESREPRESENT THE RAISEDPART OF SWITCHESDUPLEXEDTX/RXANTENNACONNECTORRX TESTCABLE50 ΩTERM.TX TESTCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(30 DB)100–WATT (MIN.)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADTX TESTCABLE2O DB IN–LINEATTENUATORIMPORTANT:WHEN PERFORMING FER TEST ONCOMPANION FRAME DIVERSITY RX,CONNECT RX TEST CABLE TOANTENNA PORT ON COLLOCATEDCOMPANION FRAME.
Test Equipment Set-up 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-70Figure 3-21: IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X ATP Test Setup With TRDCs – Agilent Test EquipmentTEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UPTOMPCTO PATRUNKINGMODULERS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSINTERNALTXCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANARX TESTCABLECOMMUNICATIONSSYSTEM ANALYZERGPIBRF IN/OUTOR RF INPUT 50 ΩRF OUTPUT 50 ΩRXANTENNACONNECTORFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMINTERNALRXCABLETXANTCPLDRXBTSCPLDTRDCTXBTSCPLDRXANTCPLDTXANTENNACONNECTORRF INPUT50 ΩRFOUTPUT50 ΩAgilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)FREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDBNC“T”TO TRIGGER INON REAR OFTRANSMITTERTESTERTO PATTERN TRIG INON REAR OF SIGNALGENERATORTO EXT REF IN ON REAR OFTRANSMITTERTESTER NOTE:10 MHZ IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO10 MHZ OUT (SWITCHED) ON REAR OF TRANSMITTER TESTER(SEE FIGURE F-16).SIGNAL GENERATORGPIB10 MHZIN10 MHZOUT50 ΩTERM.TX TESTCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(30 DB)100–WATT (MIN.)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADTRIGGER INOREVEN SECSYNCH INEXTREFINTX TESTCABLEBNC“T”PATTERNTRIG IN* BLACK RECTANGLESREPRESENT THE RAISEDPART OF SWITCHES2O DB IN–LINEATTENUATORIMPORTANT:WHEN PERFORMING FER TEST ON COMPANION FRAME DIVERSITY RX, CONNECT RX TESTCABLE TO RX ANTENNA PORT ON COLLOCATED COMPANION FRAME.Agilent E4432B (Top) and 8935 Series E6380A(Bottom)SYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDRFOUTPUT50 ΩNOTES:10 MHZ IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO10 MHZ REF OUT ON SIDE OF CDMA BASE STATION TEST SET PATTERN TRIG IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR ISCONNECTED TO EVEN SECOND SYNC IN ON SIDE OF CDMA BASESTATION TEST SET.(SEE FIGURE F-15)RFIN/OUTBNC“T”
Test Equipment Set-up68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-71Figure 3-22: IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X ATP Test Setup With TRDCs – Advantest R3267/3562 Test Equipment, Agilent E7495ATEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UPINPUT 50 ΩRF OUT50 ΩAdvantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)FREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDBNC“T”NOTE:SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR ISCONNECTED TO 10 MHZ REF OUT ON REAR OFSPECTRUM ANALYZER (SEE FIGURE F-17)TO EXT TRIG ON REAR OFSPECTRUMANALYZERTOMPCTO PATRUNKINGMODULERS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSINTERNALTXCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANARX TESTCABLESPECTRUMANALYZERGPIBINPUT50 ΩRF OUT50 ΩRXANTENNACONNECTORFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMINTERNALRXCABLETXANTENNACONNECTORSIGNAL GENERATORGPIBSYNTHEREFIN10 MHZOUT50 ΩTERM.TX TESTCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(30 DB)100–WATT (MIN.)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADEXTTRIG INMOD TIMEBASE INTX TESTCABLEBNC“T”EXT TRIG* BLACK RECTANGLESREPRESENT THE RAISEDPART OF SWITCHESTXANTCPLDRXBTSCPLDTRDCTXBTSCPLDRXANTCPLD2O DB IN–LINEATTENUATORIMPORTANT:WHEN PERFORMING FER TEST ON COMPANION FRAME DIVERSITY RX, CONNECTRX TEST CABLE TO RX ANTENNA PORT ON COLLOCATED COMPANION FRAME.Agilent E7495ARFOUTRFINSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDTO “EXT REF IN” –FREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARD
Test Set Calibration 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-72Test Set CalibrationBackgroundProper test equipment calibration helps to ensure accurate BTSoptimization and acceptance testing by assuring that the test equipmentand associated cables do not introduce measurement errors.NOTE If the test equipment set being used to optimize or test the BTShas been calibrated and maintained as a set, this procedure doesnot need to be performed.This procedure must be performed prior to beginning the optimization.Verify all test equipment (including all associated cables and adaptersactually used to interconnect test equipment items and the BTS) has beencalibrated and maintained as a set.CAUTION If any piece of test equipment, test cable, or RF adapter thatmakes up the calibrated test equipment set has been replaced, theset must be re-calibrated. Failure to do so can introducemeasurement errors, resulting in incorrect measurements anddegradation to system performance. Motorola recommendsrepeating cable calibration before testing at each BTS site.NOTE Calibration of the communications system analyzer (orequivalent test equipment) must be performed at the site beforecalibrating the overall test equipment set. Calibrate the testequipment after it has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize fora a minimum of 60 minutes.Calibration Procedures IncludedAutomaticProcedures included in this section use the LMF automated calibrationroutine to determine path losses of the supported communicationsanalyzer, power meter, associated test cables, adapters, and (if used)antenna switch that make up the overall calibrated test equipment set.After calibration, the gain/loss offset values are stored in a testmeasurement offset file on the LMF computer.ManualAgilent E4406A Transmitter Tester – The E4406A does not supportthe power level zeroing calibration performed by the LMF. If thisinstrument is to be used for Bay Level Offset calibration and calibrationis attempted with the LMF Calibrate Test Equipment function, theLMF will return a status window failure message stating that zeroingpower is not supported by the E4406A. Refer to the EquipmentCalibration section of Appendix F for instructions on using theinstrument’s self–alignment (calibration) function prior to performingBay Level Offset calibration.Power Meters – Manual power meter calibration procedures to beperformed prior to automated calibration are included in the EquipmentCalibration section of Appendix F.
Test Set Calibration68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-73Cable Calibration – Manual cable calibration procedures using the HP8921A and Advantest R3465 communications system analyzers areprovided in the Manual Cable Calibration section of Appendix F, ifneeded.GPIB AddressesGPIB addresses can range from 1 through 30. The LMF will accept anyaddress in that range, but the numbers entered in the LMF Optionswindow GPIB address boxes (Table 3-23 and Table 3-24) must matchthe addresses set in the test equipment. Motorola recommends using 1for a CDMA signal generator, 13 for a power meter, and 18 for acommunications system analyzer. To verify and, if necessary, change theGPIB addresses of the test equipment, refer to the Setting GPIBAddresses section of Appendix F.Selecting Test EquipmentSerial Connection and Network Connection tabs are provided in theLMF Options window to specify the test equipment connection method.The Serial Connection tab is used when the test equipment items areconnected directly to the LMF computer through a GPIB box (normalsetup). The Network Connection tab is used when the test equipment isto be connected remotely via a network connection.PrerequisitesBe sure the following have been completed before selecting testequipment:STest equipment is turned on.SGPIB addresses set in the test equipment have been verified as correctusing the applicable procedures in Appendix NO TAG.SLMF computer serial port and test equipment are connected to theGPIB box.Selecting Test EquipmentTest equipment may be selected either manually with operator input orautomatically using the LMF autodetect feature.
Test Set Calibration 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-74Manually Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection TabTest equipment can be manually specified before or after the testequipment is connected. The LMF does not attempt to verify the testequipment is actually detected when manual selection is specified.Follow the procedure in Table 3-23 to manually select test equipment.Table 3-23: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in the Serial Connection TabStep Action1In the LMF window menu bar, click Tools and select Options... from the pull–down menu.– The LMF Options window appears.2If it is not in the forefront, click on the Serial Connection tab.3Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port: pick list (normally COM1).4If it is not selected (black dot showing), click on the Manual Specification button.5Click on the check box(es) corresponding to the test equipment item(s) to be used.6Type the GPIB address in the corresponding GPIB address box (refer to the Setting GPIB Addressessection of Appendix F for directions on verifying and/or changing test equipment GPIB addresses).Motorola–recommended addresses are:1 = signal generator13 = power meter18 = communications system analyzerNOTEWhen test equipment items are manually selected by the operator, the LMF defaults to using a powermeter for RF power measurements. The LMF will use a communications system analyzer for RFpower measurements only if a power meter is not selected (power meter checkbox not checked).7Click on Apply.– The button will darken until the selection has been recorded.NOTEWith manual selection, the LMF does not attempt to detect the test equipment to verify it is connectedand communicating with the LMF.8Click on Dismiss to close the LMF Options window.
Test Set Calibration68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-75Automatically Selecting Test Equipment in the Serial Connection TabWhen using the auto-detection feature to select test equipment, the LMFdetermines which test equipment items are actually communicating withLMF. Follow the procedure in Table 3-24 to use the auto-detectionfeature.Table 3-24: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-DetectStep Action1In the LMF window menu bar, click Tools and select Options... from the pull–down menu.– The LMF Options window appears.2If it is not in the forefront, click on the Serial Connection tab.3Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port: pick list (normally COM1).4If it is not selected (no black dot showing), click on the Auto–Detection button.5If they are not already displayed in the box labeled GPIB address to search, click in the box and typein the GPIB addresses for the test equipment to be used, separating each address with commas and nospaces. (Refer to the Setting GPIB Addresses section of Appendix F for instructions on verifyingand/or changing test equipment GPIB addresses.)NOTEDuring the GPIB address search for a test equipment item to perform RF power measurements (that is,for TX calibration), the LMF will select the first item it finds with the capability to perform themeasurement. If, for example, the address sequence 13,18,1 is included in the GPIB addresses tosearch box, the power meter (GPIB address 13) will be used for RF power measurements. If theaddress sequence 18,13,1 is included, the LMF will use the communications system analyzer (GPIBaddress 18) for power measurements.6 Click Apply.– The button will darken until the selection has been recorded.– A check mark will appear in the applicable Manual Configuration section check boxes fordetected test equipment items.7 Click Dismiss to close the LMF Options window.
Test Set Calibration 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-76Calibrating Test EquipmentThe LMF Calibrate Test Equipment function zeros the powermeasurement level of the test equipment item that is to be used for TXcalibration and audit. If both a power meter and an analyzer areconnected (for example, an HP 437 and an HP8921A/600), only thepower meter is zeroed.NOTE The Agilent E4406A transmitter tester does not support powermeasurement level zeroing. Refer to the Equipment Calibrationsection of Appendix F for E4406A calibration.PrerequisitesSLMF computer serial port and test equipment are connected to theGPIB box.STest equipment is turned on and has warmed up for at least 60minutes.STest equipment has been selected in the LMF (Table 3-23 orTable 3-24)Follow the procedure in Table 3-25 to calibrate the test equipment.Table 3-25: Test Equipment CalibrationnStep Action1From the Util menu, select Calibrate Test Equipmentfrom the pull–down menu. A Directions window isdisplayed.2Follow the directions provided.3Click on Continue to close the Directions window andstart the calibration process. A status report window isdisplayed.4Click on OK to close the status report window.
Test Set Calibration68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-77Calibrating Cables OverviewThe LMF Cable Calibration function is used to measure the path loss(in dB) for the TX and RX cables, adapters, directional couplers, andattenuators that make up the cable configurations used for testing. Acommunications system analyzer is used to measure the loss of both theTX test cable and the RX test cable configurations. LMF cablecalibration consists of the following processes:1. Measure the loss of a short cable. This is done to compensate for anymeasurement error of the communications system analyzer. Theshort cable, which is used only for the calibration process, isconnected in series with both the TX and RX test cableconfigurations when they are measured. The measured loss of theshort cable is deducted from the measured loss of the TX and RXtest cable configurations to determine the actual loss of theconfigurations. This deduction is done so any error in the analyzermeasurement will be adjusted out of both the TX and RXmeasurements.2. Measure the loss of the short cable plus the RX test cableconfiguration. The RX test cable configuration normally consistsonly of a coax cable with type–N connectors that is long enough toreach from the BTS RX connector to the test equipment. When theBTS antenna connectors carry duplexed TX and RX signals, adirectional coupler and, if required by BTS type, an additionalattenuator are also required for the RX test cable configuration.These additional items must be included in the path lossmeasurement.3. Measure the loss of the short cable plus the TX test cableconfiguration. The TX test cable configuration normally consists oftwo coax cables with type–N connectors, a directional coupler, atermination load with sufficient rating to dissipate the BTS outputpower, and an additional attenuator, if required by the BTS type. Thetotal path loss of the TX test configuration must be as required forthe BTS (normally 30 or 50 dB). The Motorola Cybertest analyzer isdifferent from other communications system analyzers because therequired attenuation/load is built into the test set. Because of this,the Cybertest TX test configuration consists only of the requiredlength coax cable.
Test Set Calibration 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-78Calibrating Test Cabling using Communications System AnalyzerNOTE LMF cable calibration cannot be accomplished with anHP8921A analyzer for 1.9 GHz. A different analyzer type or thesignal generator and spectrum analyzer method (Table 3-27 andTable 3-28) must be used. Cable calibration values must bemanually entered into the LMF cable loss file if the signalgenerator and spectrum analyzer method is used. To use theHP8921A for manual test cable configuration calibration for 800MHz BTSs, refer to the Manual Cable Calibration section ofAppendix F.PrerequisitesSTest equipment is turned on and has warmed up for at least 60minutes.STest equipment has been selected in the LMF (Table 3-23 orTable 3-24).STest equipment has been calibrated and correctly connected for thetype of test cable configuration to be calibrated.ProcedureRefer to Figure 3-11, Figure 3-12, or Figure 3-13 and follow theprocedure in Table 3-26 to calibrate the test cable configurations.Table 3-26: Test Cabling Calibration using Comm. System AnalyzernStep Action1 Click Util in the BTS menu bar, and select CableCalibration... in the pull–down menu. A CableCalibration window is displayed.2Enter one or more channel numbers in the Channels box.NOTEMultiple channel numbers must be separated by a commawith no spaces (for example, 200,800). When two ormore channel numbers are entered, the cables will becalibrated for each channel. Interpolation will beaccomplished for other channels, as required, for TXcalibration.3 Select TX and RX CABLE CAL, TX CABLE CAL orRX CABLE CAL in the Cable Calibration picklist.4 Click OK, and follow the directions displayed for eachstep. A status report window will be displayed with theresults of the cable calibration.
Test Set Calibration68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-79Calibrate Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum AnalyzerRefer to Figure 3-23 and follow the procedure in Table 3-27 to calibratethe TX test cable configuration for all BTSs or the RX ATP test cableconfiguration for BTSs with duplexed TX/RX using the signal generatorand spectrum analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-24 and follow the procedure inTable 3-28 to calibrate the test cable configuration for non–duplexed RXusing the signal generator and spectrum analyzer.TX and Duplexed RX Cable CalibrationTable 3-27: Calibrate TX/Duplexed RX Test Cabling using Signal Generator & Spectrum AnalyzerStep Action1Connect a short test cable between the spectrum analyzer and the signal generator as shown inFigure 3-23, detail “A” (top portion of figure).2Set signal generator to 0 dBm at the customer frequency of the 869.7–893.31 MHz band for NorthAmerican cellular and 1930–1990 MHz band for North American PCS.3Use spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output and record the value for the detail “A”setup.4Change the test setup to the one shown in detail “B” (lower portion of Figure 3-23), to measure cableoutput at customer frequency (869.7–893.31 MHz band for North American cellular and 1930–1990MHz for North American PCS) and record the value measured using the detail “B” test setup.5Calibration factor = (value measured with detail “A” setup) – (value measured with detail “B” setup)Example: Cal factor = –1 dBm – (–53.5 dBm) = 52.5 dBNOTEThe short cable is used for calibration only. It is not part of the final test setup. After calibration iscompleted, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the test cable configuration as–is to ensure testprocedures use the correct calibration factor. Figure 3-23: Cal Setup for TX/Duplexed RX Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer50 OHMTERMINATION30 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLERSpectrumAnalyzerSignal GeneratorASpectrumAnalyzer40W NON–RADIATINGRF LOADBSHORT TEST CABLESignal GeneratorTHIS WILL CONNECT TO THE POWER METER ORCOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER DURING TXCALIBRATION AND TO THE COMMUNICATIONSSYSTEM ANALYZER DURING TX AND RX ATP TESTS.SHORTTESTCABLESECOND TX TEST CABLEFOR TX CAL AND ATP20DB 20 W IN–LINEATTENUATOR FOR1.9 GHZTHIS WILL CONNECT TO THE BTS TXANTENNA CONNECTOR DURING TXCALIBRATION AND TO THE TX/RX ANTENNACONNECTORS DURING ATP TESTS.TX TESTCABLERX TEST CABLEFOR RX ATP TESTOR
Test Set Calibration 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-80Non-Duplexed RX Cable CalibrationTable 3-28: Calibrating Non–Duplexed RX Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum AnalyzerStep Action1NOTEWhen preparing to calibrate a BTS with duplexed TX and RX the RX cable calibration must be doneusing calibration setup in Figure 3-23 and the procedure in Table 3-27.Connect a short test cable between the spectrum analyzer and the signal generator as shown inFigure 3-24, detail “A” (top portion of figure).2Set signal generator to –10 dBm at the customer’s RX frequency of 824.7–848.31 MHz for NorthAmerican cellular or 1850–1910 MHz band for North American PCS.3Use the spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output and record the value for the detail “A”setup.4Change the test setup to the one shown in detail “B” (lower portion of Figure 3-24) to measure theoutput at the customer’s RX frequency (824.7–848.31 MHz for North American cellular or 1850–1910MHz band for North American PCS). Record the value measured with the detail “B” test setup.5Calibration factor = (value measured with detail “A” setup) – (value measured with detail “B” setup)Example: Cal factor = –12 dBm – (–14 dBm) = 2 dBNOTEThe short test cable is used for test equipment setup calibration only. It is not part of the final testsetup. After calibration is completed, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the test cable configurationas–is to ensure test procedures use the correct calibration factor. Figure 3-24: Cal Setup for Non–Duplexed RX Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum AnalyzerSpectrumAnalyzerSignalGeneratorABSpectrumAnalyzerSHORTTESTCABLECONNECTION TO THE COMMUNICATIONSSYSTEM ANALYZER RF OUTPUTCONNECTOR DURING RX MEASUREMENTSSignalGeneratorBULLETCONNECTORRX TESTCABLESHORT TESTCABLECONNECTION TO THE BTS RX ANTENNACONNECTOR DURING RX ATPIMPORTANT: IF BTS TX/RX SIGNALS AREDUPLEXED, THE RX TEST CABLE CONNECTSTO THE DUPLEXED ANTENNA CONNECTORAND MUST USE/BE CALIBRATED WITH THE 30DB DIRECTIONAL COUPLER AND 20 DBIN–LINE ATTENUATOR. SEE FIGURE 3-23.
Test Set Calibration68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-81Setting Cable Loss ValuesCable loss values for TX and RX test cable configurations are normallyset by accomplishing automatic cable calibration using the LMF and theapplicable test equipment. The LMF stores the measured loss values inthe cable loss files. The cable loss values can also be set or changedmanually.CAUTION If cable calibration was performed without using the LMF, cableloss values must be manually entered in the LMF database.Failure to do this will result in inaccurate BTS calibration andreduced site performance.PrerequisitesSLMF is logged into the BTSTable 3-29: Setting Cable Loss ValuesStep Action1 Click Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Edit > Cable Loss in the pull–down menus.–A tabbed data entry pop–up window will appear.2Click on the TX Cable Loss tab or the RX Cable Loss tab, as required.3To add a new channel number, perform the following:3a – Click on the Add Row button.3b – Click in the Channel # or Loss (dBm) column, as required.3c – Enter the desired value.4To edit existing values, click in the data box to be changed and change the value.5To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button.6For each tab with changes, click on the Save button to save displayed values.7Click on the Dismiss button to close the window.NOTESValues entered or changed after the Save button was used will be lost when the window isdismissed.SIf cable loss values exist for two different channels the LMF will interpolate for all other channels.SEntered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. It is not necessary to log out andlog back into the LMF for changes to take effect.
Test Set Calibration 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-82Setting TX Coupler Loss ValueIf an in–service TX coupler is installed, the coupler loss must bemanually entered so it will be included in the LMF TX calibration andaudit calculations.PrerequisitesSLMF is logged into the BTSSPath loss, in dB, of the TX coupler must be knownTable 3-30: Setting TX Coupler Loss ValuesStep Action1 Click Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Edit > Coupler Loss... in the pull–down menus.–A tabbed data entry pop–up window will appear.2Click on the TX Coupler Loss tab or the RX Coupler Loss tab, as required3Click in the Loss (dBm) column for each carrier that has a coupler and enter the appropriate value.4To edit existing values, click in the data box to be changed and change the value.5For each tab with changes, click on the Save button to save displayed values.6Click on the Dismiss button to close the window.NOTESValues entered or changed after the Save button is used will be lost when the window is dismissed.SThe In–Service Calibration check box in the Tools > Options > BTS Options tab must bechecked before entered TX coupler loss values will be used by the TX calibration and auditfunctions.SNew or changed values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. Logging out and loggingin again are not required to cause saved changes to take effect.
Bay Level Offset Calibration68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-83Bay Level Offset CalibrationPurpose of Bay Level Offset CalibrationBay Level Offset (BLO) calibration is the central activity of theoptimization process. BLO calibration compensates for normalequipment variations within the BTS RF paths and assures the correcttransmit power is available at the BTS antenna connectors to meet siteperformance requirements.What is BLO Calibration?DescriptionBLO calibration is the complete title of what is normally referred to as“calibration.” Calibration identifies the accumulated gain in everytransmit path at the BTS site. The transmit path BLO values determinedduring calibration are stored in the LMF calibration data file, and aresubsequently downloaded to each BBX. When transmit path calibrationis performed, receive path BLO values will automatically be set to thedefault value in the LMF calibration file and downloaded.BTS RF Path DescriptionsTransmit (TX) path – A TX path starts at an SCCP shelf BBXbackplane slot, travels through the CIO card, is routed to the PowerAmplifier (PA) trunking module for sector phase shifting, through thePAs, back through the PA trunking module for sector phase selection,through the TX bandpass filter (starter frames) or 2:1 TX combiner(companion frames), through the Transmit & Receive Filter (TRF) orDuplexer TX/RF Filter (DRF), and ends at the TRF or DRF antennaconnector.Receive (RX) main path – A main RX path starts at ANTENNASconnectors 1A, 2A, or 3A and travels through the associated TRF orDRF, the MPC in SCCP cage slot MPC–1, the CIO card, and terminatesat a backplane BBX slot in the SCCP shelf.Diversity RX path – Diversity RX paths differ for SC4812T Lite starter(stand–alone) and companion frames. The following describe each typeof path:SStarter frame diversity RX path – A starter frame diversity RX pathis the same as a main RX path except that it starts at ANTENNASconnectors 1B, 2B, or 3B, travels through the associated TRF or DRF,and the MPC card in SCCP cage slot MPC–2 (refer to Table 1-6).SCompanion frame diversity RX path – The companion frame mainRX signal is used for the collocated companion frame diversity RXsignal. A companion frame’s diversity RX path starts at ANTENNASconnectors 1A, 2A, or 3A in the collocated companion frame. Ittravels through the associated TRF or DRF, the MPC in SCCP cageslot MPC–1, and the CIO card where it is then routed out of the framethrough the RX expansion out connectors (RX EXPANSION 1A, 2A,
Bay Level Offset Calibration 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-84or 3A). The signal travels through the inter–frame diversity RXcables, into the RX expansion in ports (RX EXPANSION 1B, 2B, or3B in NO TAG or NO TAG) of the companion frame, through theExpansion MPC (EMPC) in SCCP cage slot MPC–2, the CIO, andterminates at a backplane BBX slot in the SCCP shelf.SRFDS sampling paths – Directional couplers for RFDS signalsampling are integral to the SC4812T Lite transmit and receive pathsin the DRDCs and TRDCs. Cables connect from these directionalcouplers to the RFDS input connectors.Component Verification During CalibrationTX Path CalibrationTX path calibration supports verification of correct BTS installation, RFcabling installation and performance, functionality of all equipmentinstalled in the transmit RF chain, and the proper functioning of eachtransmit RF path. External test equipment is used to calibrate and auditthe TX paths of the BTS.RX Path CalibrationRX path calibration is not required or supported on CDMA BTSsystems. Default RX calibration values are written to the RX calibrationdata files during the TX calibration process. RX functionality is verifiedduring Frame Erasure Rate (FER) testing.When to Calibrate BLOsCalibration to determine BLO:1. Is required after initial BTS installation.2. Must be done once each year for an operational BTS site.3. Is recommended by Motorola for all associated RF paths afterreplacing any of the following components:– BBX card– SCCP shelf– CIO card– CIO–to–PA trunking module RF cable– PA trunking module– Power Amplifier– Trunking module–to–TX filter/filter combiner RF cable– TX filter or TX filter combiner– TX filter/filter combiner–to–DRDC/TRDC cable– DRDC or TRDCBLO Calibration Data FileDuring the calibration process, the LMF creates a calibration (CAL) datafile where BLO values are stored. After calibration has been completed,these offset values must be downloaded to the BBXs using the LMFBLO download function. A detailed description of the file organizationand content is provided in the following paragraphs
Bay Level Offset Calibration68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-85NOTE Due to the size of the file, Motorola recommends printing out acopy of a bts–#.cal file and referring to it for the followingdescriptions.CAL File OrganizationThe CAL file is subdivided into three sections called “slot Blocks”.These are:1. Slot[1] Block which contains the calibration data for the six primaryBBX slots.2. Slot[20] Block which contains the calibration data for the redundantBBX (see Table 3-32).3. Slot[385] Block which contains the calibration data for the RFDS.BBX Slot Block PartsBBX slot Blocks are further subdivided into the parts described in thefollowing:Slot Block Header – Each BBX slot Block has a header section (slotheader) which contains:SA creation Date and Time – broken down into separate parameters ofcreateMonth, createDay, createYear, createHour, and createMin.SThe number of calibration entries in the file – the numBayLevelPtsparameter. The parameter is fixed at 720 entries for SC4812–seriesframes. These 720 entries are combined to define the 360 calibrationpoints of the CAL file.SThe slot Block format parameter.Slot Block Bay Level Calibration Data – Each BBX slot Block has aBay Level Calibration data section (BayLevelCal) which is organized asa large flat array. The array is organized by branch, SCCP cage BBXslot, and calibration entries. There are several ways to look at the arraycontents. Two different views are provided in the following to illustratethe significant features of BayLevelCal section content and organization:SThe first view of the array is shown in Table 3-31. This view showsthe three branches of the array, transmit, main receive, and diversityreceive offsets, and the calibration entry ranges which apply to each.Table 3-31: BLO bts–#.cal File Array Branch AssignmentsRange Branch AssignmentC[1]–C[120] TransmitC[121]–C[240] No SC4812T Lite BLO cal pointentries (default only)C[241]–C[360] ReceiveC[361]–C[480] No SC4812T Lite BLO cal pointentries (default only)C[481]–C[600] Diversity ReceiveC[601]–C[720] No SC4812T Lite BLO cal pointentries (default only)
Bay Level Offset Calibration 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-86SThe second view of the array is shown in Table 3-32. This view showsthe assignment of calibration entries in each branch to each BBX slot,carrier, and sectorization. Three sectors are allowed for an SC4812TLite frame.Table 3-32: SC4812T Lite bts–#.cal File Array (By BBX/Sector)BBX Sectorization TX Branch RX Branch RX DiversityBranchSlot[1] (Primary BBXs 1 through 6)1 (Omni)3S tC[1]–C[20] C[241]–C[260] C[481]–C[500]23–Sector,1st CarrierC[21]–C[40] C[261]–C[280] C[501]–C[520]31st CarrierC[41]–C[60] C[281]–C[300] C[521]–C[540]43S tC[61]–C[80] C[301]–C[320] C[541]–C[560]53–Sector,2nd CarrierC[81]–C[100] C[321]–C[340] C[561]–C[580]62nd CarrierC[101]–C[120] C[341]–C[360] C[581]–C[600]C[121]–C[140] C[361]–C[380] C[601]–C[620]Not Used in SC4812T LiteC[141]–C[160] C[381]–C[400] C[621]–C[640]Not Used in SC4812T Lite(CAL file entries are C[161]–C[180] C[401]–C[420] C[641]–C[660](CAL file entries are Channel 0 with default t l l )C[181]–C[200] C[421]–C[440] C[661]–C[680]power set level.) C[201]–C[220] C[441]–C[460] C[681]–C[700]C[221]–C[240] C[461]–C[480] C[701]–C[720]Slot[20] (Redundant BBX–R1)1 (Omni)3S tC[1]–C[20] C[241]–C[260] C[481]–C[500]23–Sector,1st CarrierC[21]–C[40] C[261]–C[280] C[501]–C[520]31st CarrierC[41]–C[60] C[281]–C[300] C[521]–C[540]43S tC[61]–C[80] C[301]–C[320] C[541]–C[560]53–Sector,2nd CarrierC[81]–C[100] C[321]–C[340] C[561]–C[580]62nd CarrierC[101]–C[120] C[341]–C[360] C[581]–C[600]C[121]–C[140] C[361]–C[380] C[601]–C[620]Not Used in SC4812T LiteC[141]–C[160] C[381]–C[400] C[621]–C[640]Not Used in SC4812T Lite(CAL file entries are C[161]–C[180] C[401]–C[420] C[641]–C[660](CAL file entries are Channel 0 with default t l l )C[181]–C[200] C[421]–C[440] C[661]–C[680]power set level.) C[201]–C[220] C[441]–C[460] C[681]–C[700]C[221]–C[240] C[461]–C[480] C[701]–C[720]SWhen referring to the CAL file print–out and Table 3-32, it can beseen that there is one BBX slot per sector with 20 “calibration entries”per BBX (sector) for each branch. Two calibration entries define asingle “calibration point;” therefore there are ten calibration points ineach branch for each BBX.– The first entry for a calibration point (all odd entries) identifies theCDMA channel (frequency) where the BLO is measured. Thesecond calibration entry (all even entries) is the power set level(PwrLvlAdj) for that frequency. The valid range for PwrLvlAdj is
Bay Level Offset Calibration68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-87from 2500 to 27500 (2500 corresponds to –125 dBm and 27500corresponds to +125 dBm).– The ten calibration points for each slot–branch combination must bestored in order of increasing frequency. If less than ten points(frequencies) are calibrated, the BLO data for the highest frequencycalibrated is written into the remainder of the ten points for thatslot–branch.Example:C[1]=384 (odd cal entry)C[2]=19102 (even cal entry)C[3]=777 (odd cal entry)C[4]=19086 (even cal entry)C[19]=777 (odd cal entry)C[20]=19086 (even cal entry)...= 1 “calibration point”= 1 “calibration point”= 1 “calibration point”In the example above, BLO was measured at only two frequencies(channels 384 and 777) for SCCP slot BBX–1 transmit (Table 3-32).The BLO data for the highest frequency measured (channel 777) willbe written to the remaining eight transmit calibration points (definedby entries C[5] through C[20]) for BBX–1.Slot Block Temperature Compensation – Each BBX slot Block alsohas a temperature compensation data section (TempLevelCal) wherepower level compensation factors for temperature variations are stored.CAL File and BLO Data DownloadWhen BLO data is downloaded to the BBXs after calibration, the data isdownloaded to the devices in the order it is stored in the CAL file. TXcalibration data (entries C[1] – C[60]) are sent first. Data for the tenBBX slot 1 calibration points (entries C[1] – C[20]) are sent initially,followed by data for the ten BBX slot 2 calibration points (entries C[21]– C[40]), and so on. The RX calibration data is sent next in BBX slotsequence, followed by RX Diversity calibration data.
Bay Level Offset Calibration 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-88Test Equipment Setup for RF Path CalibrationFollow the steps outlined in Table 3-33 and refer as needed toFigure 3-14 or Figure 3-15 to set up test equipment.Table 3-33: Set Up Test Equipment for RF Path CalibrationStep Action1If it has not already been done, refer to the procedure in Table 3-5 (on page 3-17) to interface the LMFcomputer terminal to the frame LAN A connector.2If it has not already been done, refer to Table 3-6 (on page 3-26) to start a GUI LMF session.3If required, calibrate the test equipment per the procedure in Table 3-25 (on page 3-76).! CAUTIONTo prevent damage to the test equipment, all transmit (TX) test connections must be via the 30 dBdirectional coupler for 800 MHz or via a 30 dB coupler with a 20 dB in–line attenuator for 1900 MHz.4For TX path calibration, connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-14, Figure 3-15, orFigure 3-16, depending on the communications analyzer being used.Transmit (TX) Path Calibration DescriptionThe assigned channel frequency and desired power level at the frame TXports for transmit calibration are derived from the BTS CDF file. EachBBX at the site is assigned to a sector and carrier. These are specifiedrespectively in the sector and carrier fields of the ParentCARRIERparameter in each BBXs CDF file block. The channel frequency anddesired power for the assigned sector are specified respectively in theChannelList and SIFPilotPwr parameters of the CDF block for theCARRIER to which the BBX is assigned.NOTE Be sure the bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.cdf filesloaded on the LMF computer are current. The LMF will obtaincarrier and channel information from these files and insert it intothe appropriate CDMA Test Parameter screen. Failure to havethe most current files from the CBSC can result in incorrectchannel information being used to calibrate the BTS andunfavorable affects on BTS performance. Carrier and channelnumbers should only be entered manually for special test casesor as a last resort.The calibration process attempts to adjust the measured power to within+0.5 dB of the desired power. The calibration will pass if the error is lessthan +1.5 dB.The TX BLO for the SC 4812T Lite is approximately 42.0 dB ±5.0 dB.BLO is the gain in dB between the known power output of the BBX andthe measured power at the TX port. BLO is derived by deducting theknown BBX power output from the power measured at the TX port or(Measured Power) – (BBX TX Power Output).Example:Measured Power (at TX port) = 36.0 dBmKnown BBX TX Power Output = –6.0 dBmBLO = (36.0) – (–6.0) = 42.0 dB gain
Bay Level Offset Calibration68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-89TX Calibration and the LMFThe LMF Tests > TX > TX Calibration... and Tests > All Cal/Audit...selections perform TX BLO calibration testing for installed BBX(s). TheAll Cal/Audit... selection initiates a series of actions to perform TXcalibration, and if calibration is successful, download BLO and performTX audit. The TX Calibration... selection performs only TXcalibration. When TX Calibration... is used, BLO download and TXaudit must be performed as separate activities. The CDMA TestParameters window which opens when TX Calibration... or AllCal/Audit... is selected contains several user–selectable features whichare described in the following subsections.Rate Set Drop–down Pick ListThe Rate Set Drop–down Box is enabled if at least one MCC card isselected for the test. The available options for TX tests are 1 = 9600, and3 = 9600 1X. Option 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for thetest. The available transfer rate options for RX tests are 1 = 9600 and2 = 14400. Option 2 is only available if no 1X cards are selected.Verify BLO CheckboxIn both the TX Calibration and All Cal/Audit dialog boxes, a VerifyBLO checkbox is provided and checked by default. After the actual TXcalibration is completed during either the TX Calibration or AllCal/Audit process, the BLO derived from the calibration is compared toa standard, acceptable BLO tolerance for the BTS. In some installations,additional items may be installed in the transmit path. The additionalchange in gain from these items could cause BLO verification failureand, therefore, failure of the entire calibration. In these cases, either theVerify BLO checkbox should be unchecked or the additional path lossesshould be added into each applicable sector using theSingle–Sided BLO CheckboxAn acceptable range of BLO values for each type of BTS is establishedto allow for tolerance variations in all the components of the RF chain.This acceptable range, 42+5 dB for example, is very wide toaccommodate the redundant BBX in the BTS. This is a much widertolerance than necessary for the primary BBXs. Primary BBXs normallywill have BLOs in the lower half of the range. Using the example range,this would be from 37 to 42 dB. Checking the Single–Sided BLOcheckbox should only be done when calibrating primary BBXs becauseit will reduce the acceptable BLO value variations to the lower half ofthe range. Because this is a much more stringent tolerance, calibrationsrun with Single–Sided BLO are more likely to fail and should only beattempted by an experienced CFE. Never select Single–Sided BLOwhen calibrating a redundant BBX.
Bay Level Offset Calibration 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-90Test Pattern Drop–down Pick ListThe Tests > TX > TX Calibration... menu window has a Test Patternpull–down menu. This menu has the following choices:SStandard – performs calibration or audit using pilot, paging, synch,and six traffic channels with IS–97–specified gain. This pattern settingshould be used for all non–in–service calibrations and audits. Usingthis pattern setting requires the selection of both a BBX and at leastone MCC.SPilot (default) – performs calibration using only the pilot channel.This pattern setting should be used for in–service calibrations, andrequires selection of only a BBX.SCDFPilot – This pattern setting is for advanced users. It performscalibration or audit using the CDF value for pilot gain and IS–97 gainvalues for all the other channels included in the Standard patternsetting (paging, synch, and six traffic). Using this pattern settingrequires the selection of both a BBX and at least one MCC.SCDF – This pattern setting is for advanced users who need to useCDF gain settings for all channels included in the Standard patternsetting (pilot, paging, synch, and six traffic). Using this pattern settingrequires the selection of both a BBX and at least one MCC.Test Pattern Channels and Gain Settings – The CDMA channels andtheir respective digital gain settings used for each test pattern are listedin Table 3-34.Table 3-34: Test Patterns with Channels and Gain Settings UsedTest Pattern Channel(s) Gain SettingPilot Pilot channel only 541Standard Pilot 117Synch channel (SCH) 57Paging (PCH) 114Traffic (TCH) 80 for each of 6 Walsh codesused (6*80)CDF Pilot Pilot Uses CDF–specified pilotgainSCH 57PCH 114TCH 6*80CDF Pilot All channels useCDF ifi d iSCH CDF–specified gainsPCHTCH (6)
Bay Level Offset Calibration68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-91TX CalibrationWARNING Before installing any test equipment directly to any BTS TXOUT connector, first verify no CDMA channels are keyed.Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury and/orequipment damage.CAUTION Always wear an approved anti–static wrist strap while handlingany circuit card or module. If this is not done, there is a highprobability that the card or module could be damaged by ESD.NOTE At new site installations, to facilitate the complete test of eachSCCP shelf (if the shelf is not already fully populated with BBXboards), move BBX boards from shelves currently not under testand install them into the empty BBX slots of the shelf currentlybeing tested to insure that all BBX TX paths are tested.– This procedure can be bypassed on operational sites that aredue for periodic optimization.– Prior to testing, view the CDF (or NECF) file to verify thecorrect BBX slots are equipped. Edit the file as required toinclude BBX slots not currently equipped (per SystemsEngineering documentation).
Bay Level Offset Calibration 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-92All Cal/Audit and TX Calibration ProcedureThe LMF All Cal/Audit and TX calibration procedures are essentiallyidentical, except for the step that selects the type of procedure desired(Refer to Step 4 in Table 3-35).PrerequisitesBefore running this procedure, be sure that the following have beendone:SThe card in slot CSM 1, GLIs, MCCs, and BBXs have correct codeand data loads.SPrimary CSM and MGLI are INS_ACT (bright green).SAll BBXs are OOS_RAM (yellow).SIf running calibration or audit using a test pattern other than Pilot,MCCs are INS_ACT (bright green).STest equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TXcalibration.SLMF is logged into the BTS in the GUI environment.NOTE Verify all BBX boards removed and repositioned have beenreturned to their assigned shelves/slots. Any BBX boards movedsince they were downloaded will have to be downloaded again.Follow the procedure in Table 3-35 to perform BLO calibration on theTX paths, download BLO values to the BBXs, and perform TX pathaudit in one operation.Table 3-35: All Cal/Audit and TX Calibration ProcedureStep Action1If it has not already been done, configure test equipment for TX calibration by following theprocedure in Table 3-33.2Click on the BBX(s) to be calibrated.3If the Test Pattern to be used is Standard, CDFPilot, or CDF, select at least one MCC (refer to “TestPattern Drop–down Pick List” under “TX Calibration and the LMF” in this section).4For All Cal Audit...– Click Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select TX > All Cal/Audit... from the pull–down menus.A CDMA Test Parameters window will appear.For TX Calibration– Click Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select TX > TX Calibration from the pull–down menus.A CDMA Test Parameters window will appear.5Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed in theChannels/Carrier pick list.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking on pick list items to selectmultiple carrier(s)–sector(s).. . . continued on next page
Bay Level Offset Calibration68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-93Table 3-35: All Cal/Audit and TX Calibration ProcedureStep Action6Verify that the correct channel number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier # Channelsbox. If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.cdf files from the CBSC.NOTEIf necessary, the correct channel number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels box.7If at least one MCC was selected in Step 3, select the appropriate transfer rate (1 = 9600, 3 = 9600 1X)from the drop–down list in the Rate Set box.NOTEThe rate selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.8 If Verify BLO is to be used during the calibration, leave the checkbox checked (default).9If Single–Sided BLO is to be used during the calibration, click on the checkbox.* IMPORTANTSingle–Sided BLO should only be used for primary BBXs. Do not check the box when calibrating theredundant BBX.10 In the Test Pattern box, select the test pattern to use for the calibration from the drop–down list (referto “Test Pattern Drop–down Pick List” under “TX Calibration and the LMF” in this section).11 Click OK to display the status report window followed by a Directions pop-up window.12 Follow cable connection directions as they are displayed.– When the calibration process is completed, results will be displayed in the status report window.13 Click OK to close the status report window. Exception HandlingIn the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAILmessage in the status report window and provides information in theDescription field.Re–check the test setup and connection and re–run the calibration. If thecalibration fails again, note specifics about the failure, and refer toChapter 6, Troubleshooting.
Bay Level Offset Calibration 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-94Download BLO ProcedureAfter a successful TX path calibration, download the BLO calibrationfile data to the BBXs. BLO data is extracted from the CAL file for theBTS and downloaded to the selected BBX devices.NOTE If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this proceduredoes not need to be performed, as BLO is downloaded as part ofthe All Cal/Audit.PrerequisitesEnsure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding.SBBXs to receive the download are OOS_RAM (yellow).STX calibration was successfully completedFollow the steps in Table 3-36 to download the BLO data to the BBXs.Table 3-36: Download BLOnStep Action1Select the BBX(s) to be downloaded.2 Click Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Download> BLO from the pull–down menus. A status reportwindow displays the result of the download.NOTESelected device(s) do not change color when BLO isdownloaded.3 Click OK to close the status report window.
Bay Level Offset Calibration68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-95Calibration Audit IntroductionThe BLO calibration audit procedure confirms the successful generationand storage of the BLO calibration values. The calibration auditprocedure measures the path gain or loss of every BBX transmit path atthe site. In this test, actual system tolerances are used to determine thesuccess or failure of a test. The same external test equipment set–uprequired for TX calibration is used for TX audit.NOTE RF path verification, BLO calibration, and BLO data downloadto BBXs must have been successfully completed prior toperforming the calibration audit.TX Path AuditPerform the calibration audit of the TX paths of all equipped BBX slots,per the steps in Table 3-37.WARNING Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUTconnector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX channelskeyed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injuryand/or equipment damage.NOTE If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this proceduredoes not need to be performed, as BLO is downloaded as part ofthe All Cal/Audit.TX Audit TestThe Tests menu item, TX Audit, performs the TX BLO Audit test forBBXs. All measurements are made through the appropriate TX outputconnector using the TX calibration setup.PrerequisitesBefore running this test, the following should be done:SThe card in slot CSM 1, GLIs, BBXs have correct code load.SPrimary CSM and MGLI are INS_ACT (bright green).SAll BBXs are OOS_RAM (yellow).STest equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TXBLO calibration.SLMF is logged into the BTS.
Bay Level Offset Calibration 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-96TX Path Audit procedureAfter a TX calibration has been performed, or if verification of BLO datain the CAL file is required, follow the procedure in Table 3-37 toperform a BTS TX path audit.Table 3-37: BTS TX Path AuditnStep Action1If it has not already been done, configure test equipment for TX path audit by following the procedurein Table 3-33 (TX audit uses the same configuration as TX calibration).2Select the BBX(s) to be audited.3If the Test Pattern to be used is Standard, CDFPilot, or CDF, select at least one MCC (refer to“Test Pattern Drop–down Pick List” under “TX Calibraton and the LMF” in this section).4 Click Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select TX > TX Audit... from the pull–down menus. ACDMA Test Parameters window will appear.5Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed in theChannels/Carrier pick list.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking on pick list items toselect multiple carrier(s)–sector(s).6Verify that the correct channel number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier # Channelsbox. If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.cdf files from the CBSC.NOTEIf necessary, the correct channel number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channelsbox.7If at least one MCC was selected in Step 3, select the appropriate transfer rate (1 = 9600, 3 = 96001X) from the drop–down list in the Rate Set box.NOTEThe rate selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.8From the Test Pattern pick list, select a test pattern.– Selecting Pilot (default) performs tests using a pilot signal only.– Selecting Standard performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels. Thisrequires an MCC to be selected.– Selecting CDFPilot performs tests using the CDF value for pilot gain and IS–97 gain valuesfor all the other channels included in the Standard pattern setting (paging, synch, and sixtraffic). Using this pattern setting requires the selection of both a BBX and at least one MCC.– Selecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels, however, thegain for the channel elements is specified in the CDF file.9 Click OK to display the status report window followed by a Directions pop-up window.10 Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. When the calibration process iscompleted, results will be displayed in the status report window.11 Click on the Save Results or Dismiss button, as desired, to close the status report window.
Bay Level Offset Calibration68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-97Exception HandlingIn the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAILmessage in the status report window and provides information in theDescription field.Re–check the test setup and connections and re–run the test. If the testsfail again, note specifics about the failure, and refer to Chapter 6,Troubleshooting.Create CAL FileThe LMF Create Cal File function gets the BLO data from BBXs andcreates/updates the CAL file for the BTS. If a CAL file does not exist anew one is created. If a CAL file already exists it is updated. After aBTS has been fully optimized a copy of the CAL file must exist so it canbe transferred to the CBSC. If TX calibration has been successfullyperformed for all BBXs and BLO data has been downloaded, a CAL filewill exist. Note the following:SThe Create Cal File function only applies to selected (highlighted)BBXs.CAUTION Editing the CAL file is not encouraged as this action can causeinterface problems between the BTS and the LMF. To manuallyedit the CAL file you must first logout of the BTS. If youmanually edit the CAL file and then use the Create Cal Filefunction the edited information will be lost.PrerequisitesBefore running this procedure, the following should be done:SLMF is logged into the BTSSBBXs are OOS_RAM (yellow)SBLO has been downloaded to the BBXsTable 3-38: Create CAL FileStep Action1Select the applicable BBXs.– The CAL file will be updated for the selected BBXs only.2Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Create CalFile from the pull–down menu.– A status report window will appear and display theresults of the action.3Click the OK button to close the status report window.
RFDS Set–up and Calibration 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-98RFDS Set–up and CalibrationRFDS DescriptionThe optional RFDS is used to perform RF tests of the site from theCBSC or from the LMF. The RFDS contains the following FRUs:SAntenna Select Unit (ASU)SFixed Wireless Terminal Interface Card (FWTIC)SSubscriber Unit Assembly (SUA)For complete information regarding the RFDS, refer to the CDMACDMA RFDS Hardware Installation; 68P64113A93, CDMA RFDSUser’s Guide; 68P64114A51, and the LMF Help function on–linedocumentation.RFDS ParametersThe bts–#.cdf file includes RFDS parameter settings that must match theinstalled RFDS equipment. The paragraphs below describe the editableparameters and their defaults. Table 3-39 explains how to edit theparameter settings.SRfdsEquip – valid inputs are 0 through 2.0 = (default) RFDS is not equipped1 = Non-Cobra/Patzer box RFDS2 = Cobra RFDSSTsuEquip – valid inputs are 0 or 10 = (default) TSU not equipped1 = TSU is equipped in the systemSMC1....4 – valid inputs are 0 or 10 = (default) Not equipped1 = Multicouplers equipped in RFDS system (SC9600 internal RFDS only)SAsu1/2Equip – valid inputs are 0 or 10 = (default) Not equipped1 = EquippedSTestOrigDN – valid inputs are ’’’ (default) or a numerical string up to15 characters. (This is the phone number the RFDS dials whenoriginating a call. A dummy number needs to be set up by the switch,and is to be used in this field.)NOTE Any text editor may be used to open the bts–#.cdf file to verify,view, or modify data. Because the bts–#.cdf file is generated ona Unix system, a more sophisticated editor, such as MicroSoftWordPad, will display file content in a more easily–read formatthan many simple text editors.
RFDS Set–up and Calibration68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-99Checking and Setting RFDS ParametersFollow the procedure in Table 3-39 to review and/or edit RFDSparameters.Table 3-39: RFDS Parameter SettingsStep ActionNOTELog out of the BTS prior to perform this procedure.1Using a text editor, verify the following fields are set correctly in the bts–#.cdf file:EXAMPLE:Asu1Equip = 1Asu2Equip = 0 (1 if system is non-duplexed)Mc1Equip = 0Mc2Equip = 0Mc3Equip = 0Mc4Equip = 0RfdsEquip = 2TestOrigDN = ’123456789’TsuEquip = 1NOTEThe above is an example of entries extracted from the bts–#.cdf file that should have been generatedby the OMC–R and copied to the LMF. These fields will have been set by the OMC–R if theRFDSPARM database is modified for the RFDS.2Save changes and/or quit the editor.3Log into the BTS using an LMF GUI session(refer to Table 3-6).4 If no changes were made to the bts–#.cdf file fields listed in step 1, proceed to Step 7. If changes weremade, continue with Step 5.5NOTETo make certain the complete data download is accepted, the MGLI should be OOS_RAM (yellow)when RFDS parameter settings are downloaded.When changes are made to RFDS parameters in the bts–#.cdf file, data must be downloaded to theMGLI by performing the following:5a – To be sure it does not take control when the MGLI is disabled, manually disable the redundantGLI card by unseating it from the backplane connectors and sliding it partially out of the shelfslot.5b – Click on the MGLI.5c – Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Disable from the pull–down menu.–– A status report window shows the status of the operation.5d – When the operation is complete, click OK to close the status report window.5e – Click on the MGLI (now OOS_RAM (yellow)).5f – Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Download > Data from the pull–down menus(selected devices do not change color when data is downloaded).–– A status report window shows the status of the download.. . . continued on next page
RFDS Set–up and Calibration 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-100Table 3-39: RFDS Parameter SettingsStep Action5g – Click OK to close the status report window.5h – Click on the MGLI.5i – Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Enable from the pull–down menu.–– A status report window shows the status of the operation.5j – When the operation is complete, click OK to close the status report window.! CAUTIONWhen the MGLI changes to INS_ACT, data will automatically be downloaded to the RFDS. Duringthis process, the RFDS LED will slowly begin flashing red and green for approximately 2–3 minutes.DO NOT attempt to perform any functions with the RFDS until the LED remains steady green.5k – Re–seat the redundant GLI card into the backplane connectors and lock it in place with the ejectortabs.5l – Once the redundant GLI initializes, download data to it by selecting the card and, in the BTSmenu bar, clicking Device and selecting Download > Data from the pull–down menus.6Any MCCs that were INS_ACT when the MGLI was disabled must be disabled, downloaded withdata, and re–enabled as follows:6a – Select the devices to be reset by clicking on them or using Select from the BTS menu bar andclicking on MCCs in the pull–down menu.6b – In the BTS menu bar, click on Device and select Disable from the pull–down menu.–– A status report window shows the status of the operation.6c – Click OK to close the status report window.6d – Repeat Step 6a to select the MCCs.6e – Click on Device in the BTS menu bar and select Download > Data from the pull–down menu.(Selected devices do not change colot when data is downoaded.)– A status report window shows the status of the download.6f – Click on OK to close the status report window.6g – When data download is complete, enable the MCCs by following the procedure in Table 3-17.7Click on the RFDS tab.8Status the RFDS TSU by performing the following:8a – Click on the SUA to select it.8b – Click on TSU in the BTS menu bar, and select Status TSU from the pull–down menu.–– A status report shows the software version number for the TSIC and SUA.. . . continued on next page
RFDS Set–up and Calibration68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-101Table 3-39: RFDS Parameter SettingsStep Action8c – Click OK to close the status report window.NOTEIf the LMF displays an error message, check the following:SEnsure AMR cable is correctly connected from the BTS to the RFDS.SVerify RFDS has power.SVerify RFDS status LED is green.SVerify entries in RFDS fields of the bts–#.cdf file are correct (refer to step 1).SStatus the MGLI and ensure it is communicating (by Ethernet) with the LMF, and is in the properstate (INS_ACT (bright green)).
RFDS Set–up and Calibration 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-102RFDS TSU NAM ProgrammingThe Number Assignment Module (NAM) information needs to beprogrammed into the TSU before it can receive and process test calls, orbe used for any type of RFDS test. The RFDS TSU NAM must beprogrammed with the appropriate system parameters and phone numberduring hardware installation. The TSU phone and TSU MSI must berecorded for each BTS used for OMC–R RFDS software configuration.NOTE The user will only need to program the NAM for the initialinstallation of the RFDS.Explanation of Parameters Used When Programming the TSU NAMTable 3-40 defines the parameters used when editing the tsu.nam file.Table 3-40: Definition of ParametersAccess Overload CodeSlot IndexSystem IDNetwork IDThese parameters are obtained from the switch.Primary Channel APrimary Channel BSecondary Channel ASecondary Channel BThese parameters are the channels which are to be used in operationof the system.Lock CodeSecurity CodeService LevelStation Class MarkDo NOT change.IMSI MCCIMSI 11 12 These fields are obtained at the OMC using the following command:OMC000>disp bts–# imsiIf the fields are blank, replace the IMSI fields in the NAM file to 0,otherwise use the values displayed by the OMC.MIN Phone Number These fields are the phone number assigned to the mobile. The ESNand MIN must be entered into the switch as well.NOTEThis field is different from the TODN field in the bts–#.cdf file. TheMIN is the phone number of the RFDS subscriber, and the TODN isthe number the subscriber calls.
RFDS Set–up and Calibration68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-103Valid NAM RangesTable 3-41 provides the valid NAM field ranges. If any of the fields aremissing or out-of–range, the RFDS will error out.Table 3-41: Valid NAM Field RangesValid RangeNAM Field Name Minimum MaximumAccess Overload Code 0 15Slot Index 0 7System ID 0 32767Network ID 0 32767Primary Channel A 25 1175Primary Channel B 25 1175Secondary Channel A 25 1175Secondary Channel B 25 1175Lock Code 0 999Security Code 0 999999Service Level N/A N/AStation Class Mark 0 255IMSI 11 12 0 99IMSI MCC 0 999MIN Phone Number N/A N/A
RFDS Set–up and Calibration 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-104Set Antenna Map DataThe antenna map data must be entered manually if an RFDS is installed.Antenna map data does not need to be entered if an RFDS is notinstalled. The antenna map data is only used for RFDS tests and isrequired if an RFDS is installed.PrerequisiteSLMF is logged into the BTSFollow the procedure in Table 3-42 to set antenna map data for theRFDS.Table 3-42: Set Antenna Map DataStep Action1Click on Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Edit > Antenna Map... from the pull–down menus.–A tabbed data entry pop–up window will appear.2In the data entry pop–up window, click on the TX Antenna Map or RX Antenna Map tab to selectthe antenna map to be edited.3Locate the carrier and sector number for which data is to be entered or edited, and click in the columnwhere entry or editing is needed.4Enter/edit Antenna # and Antenna Label column data as needed for each carrier.NOTERefer to the CDMA Help > Utility Menu > Edit–Antenna Map... section of LMF Help functionon–line documentation for antenna map examples.5For each tab with changes, click on the Save button to save displayed values.6Click on the Dismiss button to close the window.NOTESValues entered or changed after the Save button was used will be lost when the window isdismissed.SEntered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. It is not necessary to log out andlog back into the LMF for changes to take effect.
RFDS Set–up and Calibration68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-105Set RFDS Configuration DataIf an RFDS is installed, the RFDS configuration data must be manuallyentered.PrerequisiteSLMF is logged into the BTSNOTE The entered antenna# index numbers must correspond to theantenna# index numbers used in the antenna maps.Follow the procedure in Table 3-43 to set RFDS configuration data.Table 3-43: Set RFDS Configuration DataStep Action1Click on Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Edit > RFDS Configuration... from the pull–downmenus.–A tabbed data entry pop–up window will appear.2In the data entry pop–up window, click on the TX RFDS Configuration or RX RFDS Configurationtab, as required.3To add a new antenna number, perform the following:3a – Click on the Add Row button.3b – Click in the Antenna #, Cal Antenna, Scap Antenna, or Populate [Y/N] columns, as required.3c – Enter the desired data.4To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value.NOTERefer to the CDMA Help > Utility Menu > Edit–RFDS Configuration... section of LMF Helpfunction on–line documentation for RFDS configuration data examples.5To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button.6For each tab with changes, click on the Save button to save displayed values.7Click on the Dismiss button to close the window.NOTESValues entered or changed after the Save button was used will be lost when the window isdismissed.SEntered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. It is not necessary to log out andlog back into the LMF for changes to take effect.
RFDS Set–up and Calibration 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-106RFDS CalibrationThe RFDS Calibration option is used to calibrate the RFDS TX and RXpaths.TX Path Calibration – For a TX antenna path calibration the BTSXCVR is keyed at a pre–determined power level and the BTS poweroutput level is measured by the RFDS. The power level is then measuredat the TX antenna directional coupler by the power measuring testequipment item being used (power meter or analyzer). The difference(offset) between the power level at the RFDS and the power level at theTX antenna directional coupler is used as the TX RFDS calibrationoffset value.RX Path Calibration – For an RX antenna path calibration the RFDS iskeyed at a pre–determined power level and the power input level ismeasured by the BTS BBX. A CDMA signal at the same power levelmeasured by the BTS BBX is then injected at the RX antenna directionalcoupler by the communications system analyzer. The difference (offset)between the RFDS–keyed power level and power level measured at theBTS BBX is the RFDS RX calibration offset value.RFDS calibration and the CAL file – The TX and RX RFDScalibration offset values are written to the CAL file in the slot[385]Block.TSIC channel frequency – For each RFDS TSIC, the channelfrequency is determined at the lower third and upper third of theappropriate band using the frequencies listed in Table 3-44.Table 3-44: RFDS TSIC Calibration Channel FrequenciesSystem Channel Calibration Points800 MHz (A and B) 341 and 6821.9 GHz 408 and 791WARNING Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUTconnector, verify that there are no CDMA channels keyed.Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury and/orequipment damage.PrerequisitesSTest equipment has been selected.STest equipment and test cables have been calibrated.STX calibration has been performed and BLO data has beendownloaded to the BBXs.STest equipment and test cables are connected for TX calibration.SAntenna map data has been entered for the site.SBBXs are OOS–RAM.
RFDS Set–up and Calibration68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-107RFDS Calibration ProcedureFollow the procedure in Table 3-45 to perform RFDS calibration.Table 3-45: RFDS CalibrationStep Action1In the LMF, select the CDMA BTS–xxx tab.2If the BTS Control button is not selected (no black dot showing), click on the B button in the BTSmenu bar to select it.3Select the BBX(s) assigned to the carrier(s) and sector(s) which will be used in RFDS calibration(refer to Table 1-6 for BBX carrier and sector assignments).4Click on RFDS in the BTS menu bar, and select RFDS Calibration... from the pull–down menu. AnRFDS Calibration set–up window will be displayed.5In the Tests to Perform box, select TX Calibration or RX Calibration, as required6Enter the appropriate channel number(s) (refer to Table 3-44) in the Channel Field box.STo enter more than one channel number, use the following methods:– Separate non–sequential channel numbers with a comma and no spaces; for example: 247,585,742.– Enter a range of sequential channels by typing the first and last channel numbers in the rangeseparated by a dash and no spaces; for example: 385–395.7If the frame is equipped with TX combiners, click in the Has Combiners checkbox.8Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) from the Carriers pick list (hold down the Shift or Ctrlkey while clicking on pick list items to select multiple carrier(s)–sector(s)).9Select the appropriate RX branch (Both, Main, or Diversity) in the drop–down list if performing RXcalibration.10 Click on the OK button. A status report window is displayed, followed by a Directions pop–upwindow.11 Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.12 When the test is completed, test results are displayed in the status report window.13 Click on the OK button to close the status report window.14 Click on the Frame tab.15 Select the MGLI by clicking on it.16 Download updated RFDS offset data to the MGLI (see Step 5 in Table 3-39).
RFDS Set–up and Calibration 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-108Program TSU NAMThe NAM must be programmed before it can receive and process testcalls, or be used for any type of RFDS test.PrerequisitesSMGLI is INS_ACT (bright green).SSUA is powered up and has a code load.Follow the procedure in Table 3-46 to program the TSU NAM.Table 3-46: Program NAM ProcedureStep Action1In the LMF, select the RFDS tab.2Select the SUA by clicking on it.3Click on TSU in the BTS menu bar, and select Program TSU NAM from the pull–down menu.– A NAM programming window will appear.4Enter the appropriate information in the boxes (see Table 3-40 and Table 3-41) .5Click on the OK button to display the status report.6Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
Alarms Testing68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-109Alarms TestingAlarm VerificationAlarms testing should be performed at a convenient point in theoptimization/ATP process, since the LMF is necessary to ensure that theSC4812ET Lite is generating the appropriate alarms.The SC 4812ET Lite is capable of concurrently monitoring 10 customerdefined input signals and four customer defined outputs, which interfaceto the 50–pair punchblock. All alarms are defaulted to “Not Equipped”during ATP testing. Testing of these inputs is achieved by triggering thealarms and monitoring the LMF for state–transition messages from theMGLI.Alarm Reporting DisplayThe Alarm Monitor window can be displayed to list alarms that occurafter the window is displayed. The Alarm Monitor window is accessedfrom the BTS menu bar.The following buttons are included in the Alarm Monitor window:SThe Options button allows for a severity level (Warning, Minor,Major, Critical, and Unknown) selection. The default is all levels.To change the level of alarms reported click on the Options buttonand highlight the desired alarm level(s). To select multiple levels pressthe Ctrl key (for individual selections) or Shift key (for a range ofselections) while clicking on the desired levels.SThe Pause button can be used to pause/stop the display of alarms.When the Pause button is clicked the name of the button changes toContinue. When the Continue button is click the display of alarmswill continue. Alarms that occur between the time the Pause button isclicked and the Continue button is clicked will not be displayed.SThe Clear button can be used to clear the Alarm Monitor display.New alarms that occur after the Clear button is clicked will bedisplayed.SThe Dismiss button is used to dismiss/close the Alarm Monitordisplay.Alarm Testing Set–upPrepare for any alarm testing by following the procedures in Table 3-47.Table 3-47: Alarm Testing PreparationStep Action1If it has not already been done, refer to the procedure in Table 3-5 to connect the LMF computerterminal to the frame LAN A connector.2If it has not already been done, refer to Table 3-6 to start a GUI LMF session.3Click on Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Alarm Monitor... from the pull–down menu.– An Alarm Monitor window will open.
Alarms Testing 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT3-110AC Fail AlarmTable 3-48 gives instructions on testing the AC Fail Alarm.Table 3-48: AC Fail AlarmStep Action1NOTE– Back–up batteries must be installed when performing this test.– To prevent inadvertently shutting down the RF compartment electronics, the batteries should becharged before performing this test.Set the ACLC MAIN circuit breaker to OFF.– The LMF should report an alarm for an AC Fail condition as BTS Relay #21, BTS Relay #23,BTS Relay #24, and BTS Relay #29 contacts, respectively.– On the MAP, the MAJOR ALARM (red), MINOR ALARM (amber), and RECTIFIER FAIL(red) LEDs should light.– On the rectifiers, the DC and PWR LEDs should light red.2Set the ACLC MAIN circuit breaker to ON.– On the LMF, the AC Fail alarm should clear.– On the MAP, the MAJOR ALARM, MINOR ALARM, and RECTIFIER FAIL LEDs shouldextinguish.– On the rectifiers, the DC and PWR LEDs should change to green.Minor AlarmTable 3-49 gives instructions on performing a test to display a minoralarm.Table 3-49: Minor AlarmStep Action1Set the TCP switch on the MAP to OFF. This will generate a minor alarm.– The LMF should report the minor alarm as BTS Relay #24 contacts.– The TC DISABLE (red) and MINOR ALARM (amber) LEDs on the MAP should light.2Set the TCP switch to ON.– The alarm condition indications should clear. Before Leaving the SiteIf no further operations are required after performing the alarm tests,complete the requirements in Table 5-8 before leaving the site.
Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT4-1Chapter 4Automated Acceptance TestProcedures4
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT4-2Automated Acceptance Test ProcedureIntroductionThe Acceptance Test Procedures (ATP) allow Cellular Field Engineers(CFEs) to run automated acceptance tests on all BTS subsystem devicesequipped in the CDF using the LMF and the test equipment it supports.The CFE can choose to save the results of ATP tests to a report file fromwhich ATP reports are generated for later printing. See the Generating anATP Report section in this chapter.Because test equipment functions during acceptance testing arecontrolled by the LMF through the GPIB, only the test equipmentmodels supported by the LMF can be used.NOTE – Before using the LMF, read the Release Notes “Caveats”section in the LMF Help function on–line documentationfor any applicable information.– The ATP test is to be performed on out-of-service sectorsonly.– DO NOT substitute test equipment with other models notsupported by the LMF.Refer to Chapter 3 for detailed interconnection information needed forcalibrating equipment, cables, and other test equipment set components.Reduced ATPNOTE Equipment has been factory–tested for FCC compliance. Iflicense–governing bodies require documentation supporting BTSsite compliance with regulations, a full ATP may be necessary.Perform the Reduced ATP only if reports for the specific BTSsite are NOT required.After downloading the proper operational software to the BTS, the CFEmust perform these procedures (minimum recommendation):1. Verify the TX/RX paths by performing TX Calibration, TX Audit,and FER tests.2. Retrieve Calibration Data required for normal site operation.Should failures occur while performing the specified tests, refer to theBasic Troubleshooting section of this manual for help in determining thefailure point. Once the point of failure has been identified and corrected,refer to the BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix (Table C-1) todetermine the applicable test that must be performed.In the unlikely event that the BTS passes these tests but has a forwardlink problem during normal operation, the CFE should then perform theadditional TX tests for troubleshooting: TX spectral mask, TX rho, andTX code domain.4
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT4-3ATP Test OptionsATP tests can be run individually or as one of the following groups:SAll TX: TX tests verify the performance of the BTS transmitelements. These include the GLI, MCC, BBX, trunking modules, theLPAs, and passive components including splitters, combiners,bandpass filter(s), and RF cables.SAll RX: The RX test verifies the performance of the BTS receiveelements. These include the MPC, EMPC (for companion frames),BBX, MCC, GLI modules, and the passive components including RXfilters and RF cables.SAll TX/RX: Executes all TX and RX tests.SFull Optimization: Executes the TX calibration, downloads BLO,and executes the TX audit before running all TX and RX tests.ATP PrerequisitesBefore attempting to run any ATP tests, be sure the following have beencompleted:SBTS has been optimized (BBXs calibrated and BLOs downloaded)(Chapter 3)SThe carrier(s) and/or sector(s) to be tested have been taken out ofservice at the CBSC.SLMF is logged into the BTS.SCSMs, GLIs, BBXs, MCCs and TSU (if the RFDS is installed) havecorrect code and data loads.SPrimary CSM and GLI are INS_ACT (bright green).SMCCs are INS_ACT (bright green).SNo BBXs are keyed (transmitting).SBBXs are OOS_RAM (yellow).STest cables are calibrated.STest equipment has been selected, warmed up 60 minutes, andcalibrated.SGPIB is on.SBTS transmit connectors are properly terminated for the test(s) to beperformed.WARNING 1. All transmit connectors must be properly terminated for allATP tests.2. Before the FER is run, be sure that one of the following isdone:– All transmitter connectors are properly terminatedOR– All LPAs are turned OFF (circuit breakers pulled)Failure to observe these warnings may result in bodily injury orequipment damage.4
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT4-4TX/RX Antenna ConnectionsStarter (Stand–alone) FramesRefer to NO TAG or NO TAG for identification of starter frame transmitand receive antenna connections where measurements are to be taken.All ATP test equipment connections for starter frames are made at theANTENNAS connectors on the RF interface panel.Companion FramesTX ATP Antenna Connections – Each companion frame at a siteconnects independently to transmit antennas. Test equipmentconnections for TX ATPs on each companion frame are made at theANTENNAS connectors as on starter frames. Companion frameANTENNAS connectors are shown in NO TAG and NO TAG.Antenna Connections for RX main ATP – Each companion frame at asite uses independent receive antennas for main RX signals. The mainRX signals are either routed through TRDC RX ANTENNASconnectors (NO TAG) or duplexed with TX signals through the singleDRDC ANTENNAS connectors (NO TAG).Antenna Connections for RX diversity ATP – Companion framediversity RX signals are obtained from the RX main antenna of thecollocated companion frame. The main RX signals are sent from thecollocated companion frame through inter–frame diversity RX cables tothe RX EXPANSION 1B, 2B, or 3B connectors of the frame where theyare used for diversity RX (refer to Figure 4-1). Diversity RX ATP testequipment connections are made at one of two different locationsdepending on whether or not the companion frame under test isconnected to a collocated companion frame. Connection points for eachsituation are as follows:SConnected companion frames: When inter–frame diversity RXcables are connected, connect test equipment for diversity RX ATP atthe ANTENNAS connectors of the collocated companion frame asshown in Figure 4-1 and listed in Table 4-1. Be sure MPC is selectedbefore logging the LMF into the frame or FER will fail.4
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT4-5SDisconnected companion frames: When inter–frame diversity RXcables are disconnected, connect test equipment for diversity RX ATPat the RX EXPANSION connectors 1B, 2B, or 3B on the frame undertest. Refer to Figure 4-1 and Table 4-2. Be sure EMPC is selectedbefore logging the LMF into the frame or FER will fail.Figure 4-1: SC4812ET Lite Companion Frame Diversity RX Simplified Interconnection DiagramMPC1A2A3ACIOEMPCINTER–FRAMEDIVERSITY RXCABLES1A2A3ARX MAIN(3 SECTORS) RX DIVERSITY(3 SECTORS)RX MAIN(3)TOBBXSANTENNASCONNECTORS(TRDC/DRDC)RX EXPANSIONCONNECTORSSC4812ET LITE COMPANION FRAME 1MPC1A2A3ACIOEMPC1A2A3ARX MAIN(3)TOBBXSSC4812ET LITE COMPANION FRAME 2RX EXPANSIONCONNECTORSANTENNASCONNECTORS(TRDC/DRDC)SC4812ETL0045–1SIGNALS: RX MAINRX DIVERSITYNOTE: ANTENNAS connectors represent TRDC/DRDC portion of receive path.RX DIVERSITY ATP CONNECTION POINTS:1: For Companion Frame 1 when inter–frame diversityRX cables are connected.2: For Companion Frame 1 when inter–frame diversityRX cables are disconnected.3: For Companion Frame 2 when inter–frame diversityRX cables are connected.4: For Companion Frame 2 when inter–frame diversityRX cables are disconnected.1234RX EXPANSIONCONNECTORSRX EXPANSIONCONNECTORS3B2B1B3B2B1BRX MAIN(3 SECTORS)RX DIVERSITY(3 SECTORS)4
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT4-6Table 4-1: To Perform Companion Frame Diversity RX FER,Inter–frame RX Cables Connected(Set Multi–Channel Preselector to MPC)On Connect RX Test Cable toCollocated Companion FrameCarrier SectorCollocated Companion FrameRX or Duplexed TX/RXANTENNAS Connector1 1A12 2A3 3A1 1A22 2A3 3A Table 4-2: To Perform Companion Frame Diversity RX FER,Inter–frame RX Cables Disconnected(Set Multi–Channel Preselector to EMPC)On Connect RX Test Cable toFrame Under TestCarrier SectorFrame Under TestRX EXPANSION Connector1 1B12 2B3 3B1 1B22 2B3 3B 4
Acceptance Tests – Test Set–up68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT4-7Acceptance Tests – Test Set–upRequired Test EquipmentThe following test equipment is required:SLMFSPower meter (used with HP8921A/600 and Advantest R3465)SCommunications system analyzerSSignal generator for FER testing (required for all communicationssystem analyzers for 1X FER)WARNING –Before installing any test equipment directly to any BTSTX OUT connector, verify that there are no CDMAchannels keyed.– At active sites, have the OMCR/CBSC place the carrierassigned to the LPAs under test OOS. Failure to do so canresult in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.NOTE The test equipment must be re–calibrated before using it toperform the TX Acceptance Tests.Acceptance Test Equipment Set UpAll ATP testing – Follow the steps in Table 4-3 to set up test equipmentfor all tests.Table 4-3: Set Up Test Equipment – TX Output Verify/Control TestsStep Action1If it has not already been done, interface the LMF computer to the BTS (refer to Table 3-5 andFigure 3-3).2If it has not already been done, refer to Table 3-6 to start a GUI LMF session and log into the BTS.3If it has not already been done, refer to Figure 3-17, Figure 3-18, Figure 3-19, Figure 3-20,Figure 3-21, or Figure 3-22, as applicable, for the test equipment and antenna duplexing being used, toconnect test equipment for acceptance testing.NOTELMF–based measurements factor in TX test cable loss between the RFMF and test equipment. Ifadditional attenuation, such as external TX combiners, is inserted in the path, it must be identified tothe LMF by including it in the TX test cable calibration. If this is not possible, include the attenuationin the TX path by editing cable loss values (refer to Table 3-29). Failure to do this will result in testinaccuracies and potential for erroneous ATP failures because the additional losses would not becompensated for in the test measurements. 4
Acceptance Tests – Test Set–up 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT4-8Companion frame All TX/RX, All RX, and FER for Diversity RX –When performing All TX/RX, All RX, or FER ATP for companionframe diversity RX, perform the additional test equipment set–upprocedures in Table 4-4.Table 4-4: Additional Diversity RX Test Set–up for Companion FramesStep Action1If the LMF is logged into the BTS, log out of the BTS.2If the inter–frame diversity RX cabling to a collocated companion frame is:SConnected to the companion frame under test, proceed to step 3.SDisconnected from the companion frame under test, proceed to step 7.3For companion frames with inter–frame diversity RX cables connected, click on the LMF Login tab.4In the Equipage Information box, select MPC from the Multi–Channel Preselector picklist.5Make RX test cable connections for diversity RX FER according to Figure 4-1 and Table 4-1.6Proceed to step 10.7For companion frames with inter–frame diversity RX cables disconnected, click on the LMF Logintab.8In the Equipage Information box, select EMPC from the Multi–Channel Preselector picklist.9Make RX test cable connections for diversity RX FER according to Figure 4-1 and Table 4-2.10 Click on the LMF BTS# tab, and return to the procedure for the ATP being performed. 4
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT4-9Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance TestsAll–inclusive TestsGeneral – The all–inclusive acceptance tests are performed from theLMF GUI environment. These all–inclusive tests are called abbreviatedATPs because they execute various combinations of individualacceptance tests with a single command. This allows verification ofmultiple aspects of BTS performance while minimizing time needed forindividual test set up and initiation.Abbreviated ATP Options – There are three abbreviated acceptancetests which evaluate different performance aspects of the BTS. Thisallows the CFE to select testing to meet the specific requirements forindividual maintenance and performance verification situations. Thefollowing summarizes the coverage of each abbreviated test:SAll TX/RX. Performs all transmit and receive ATPs on the selectedMCCs and BBXs.SAll TX. Performs complete set of transmit ATPs on the selectedMCCs and BBXs. Testing is the equivalent of performing all of thefollowing individual tests:–TX Mask Test–Rho Test–Pilot Time Offset Test–Code Domain Power TestSAll RX. Performs complete receive ATP on the selected MCCs andBBXs. Testing is the equivalent of performing the following:–FER TestAbbreviated ATP Procedures – Procedures to accomplish each type ofabbreviated ATP are included in the following subsections.4
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT4-10All TX/RX ATP TestFollow the procedures in Table 4-5 to perform the abbreviated,all–inclusive transmit and receive test.Table 4-5: All TX/RX ATP Test ProcedureStep Action1Set up the test equipment initially for abbreviated tests as described in Table 4-3.2If a companion frame is being tested and either BOTH or DIV is to be selected in step 7, perform theadditional test equipment set–up in Table 4-4 for the diversity RX portion of the ATP.NOTEIf the LMF has been logged into the BTS with a different Multi–Channel Preselector setting than theone to be used for this test, the LMF must be logged out of the BTS and logged in again with the newMulti–Channel Preselector setting. Using the wrong MPC setting can cause a false test failure.3Select the BBXs and MCCs to be tested.4Click on Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select All TX/RX ATP... from the pull–down menu.5Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed in theChannels/Carrier pick list.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking on pick list items to selectmultiple carrier(s)–sector(s).6Verify that the correct channel number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier # Channelsbox. If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.cdf files from the CBSC.NOTEIf necessary, the correct channel number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels box.7NOTEIf a companion frame with the inter–frame diversity RX cabling disconnected is being tested do notselect BOTH in this step. The RX main and diversity paths must be tested separately for thisconfiguration because each requires a different Multi–Coupler Preselector type to provide the propertest signal gain.Select the appropriate RX branch (BOTH, MAIN, or DIVersity) in the drop–down list.8In the Rate Set box, select the appropriate data rate (1=9600 3=9600 1X) from the drop–down list.NOTEThe Rate Set selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.9Enter the channel elements to be tested for the RX ATP in the Channel Element(s) box. By default,all channel elements are specified.Use one of thefollowing methods to enter more than one channel element:– Enter non–sequential channel elements separated by a comma and no spaces (for example;0,5,15).– Enter a range of sequential channel elements by typing the first and last channel elementsseparated by two periods (for example; 0..15).NOTEThe channel element numbers are 0.based; that is the first channel element is 0.. . . continued on next page4
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT4-11Table 4-5: All TX/RX ATP Test ProcedureStep Action10 In the Test Pattern box, select the test pattern to use for the acceptance tests from the drop–down list(refer to “Test Pattern Drop–down Pick List” under “TX Calibration and the LMF” in the Bay LevelOffset Calibration section of Chapter 3).11 Click OK to display a status bar followed by a Directions pop-up window.12 NOTEWhen testing diversity RX paths on companion frames, be sure to follow the RX test cable connectioninformation in Table 4-1 or Table 4-2, as applicable, during this step.Follow cable connection directions as they are displayed, and click the Continue button to begintesting.– As the ATP process is completed, results will be displayed in the status report window.13 Click the Save Results or Dismiss button.NOTEIf Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file. 4
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests 68P64115A18–1Mar 20031X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT4-12All TX ATP TestFollow the procedures in Table 4-6 to perform the abbreviated,all–inclusive transmit test.Table 4-6: All TX ATP Test ProcedureStep Action1Set up the test equipment for abbreviated tests per Table 4-3.2Select the BBXs and MCCs to be tested.3Click on Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select All TX ATP... from the pull–down menu.4Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed in theChannels/Carrier pick list.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking on pick list items to selectmultiple carrier(s)–sector(s).5Verify that the correct channel number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier # Channelsbox. If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.cdf files from the CBSC.NOTEIf necessary, the correct channel number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels box.6In the Rate Set box, select the appropriate transfer rate (1 = 9600, 3 = 9600 1X) from the drop–downlist.NOTEThe Rate Set Selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.7In the Test Pattern box, select the test pattern to use for the acceptance test from the drop–down list(refer to “Test Pattern Drop–down Pick List” under “TX Calibration and the LMF” in the Bay LevelOffset Calibration section of Chapter 3).8 Click OK to display a status bar followed by a Directions pop-up window.9Follow cable connection directions as they are displayed, and click the Continue button to begintesting.– As the ATP process is completed, results will be displayed in the status report window.10 Click the Save Results or Dismiss button.NOTEIf Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file. All RX ATP TestFollow the procedure in Table 4-7 to perform the abbreviated,all–inclusive receive test.Table 4-7: All RX ATP Test ProcedureStep Action1Set up the test equipment for abbreviated tests per Table 4-3.. . . continued on next page4
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests68P64115A18–1Mar 2003 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release R2.16.1.xDRAFT4-13Table 4-7: All RX ATP Test ProcedureStep Action2If a companion frame is being tested and either BOTH or DIV is to be selected in step 7, perform theadditional test equipment set–up in Table 4-4 for the diversity RX portion of the ATP.NOTEIf the LMF has been logged into the BTS with a different Multi–Channel Preselector setting than theone to be used for this test, the LMF must be logged out of the BTS and logged in again with the newMulti–Channel Preselector setting. Using the wrong MPC setting can cause a false test failure.3Select the BBXs and MCCs to be tested.4Click on Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select All RX ATP... from the pull–down menu.5Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed in theChannels/Carrier pick list.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking on pick list items to selectmultiple carrier(s)–sector(s).6Verify that the correct channel number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier # Channelsbox. If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.cdf files from the CBSC.NOTEIf necessary, the correct channel number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels box.7NOTEIf a companion frame with the inter–frame diversity RX cabling disconnected is being tested do notselect BOTH in this step. The RX main and diversity paths must be tested separately for thisconfiguration because each requires a different Multi–Coupler Preselector type to provide the propertest signal gain.Select the appropriate RX branch (BOTH, MAIN, or DIVersity) in the drop–down list.8In the Rate Set box, select the appropriate data rate (1=9600, 2=14400, 3=9600 1X) from thedrop–down list.NOTEThe Rate Set selection of 1 is only available if non–1X cards are selected for the test.The Rate Set selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.9Enter the channel elements to be tested for the RX ATP in the Channel Element(s) box. By default,all channel elements are specified.Use one of the following methods to enter more than one channel element:– Enter non–sequential channel elements separated by a comma and no spaces (for example;0,5,15).– Enter a range of sequential channel elements by typing the first and last channel elementsseparated by two periods (for example; 0..15).NOTEThe channel element numbers are 0.based; that is the first channel element is 0.10 Click OK to display a status bar followed by a Directions pop-up window.. . . continued on next page4

Navigation menu